LG | 32LD690 | LG 32LD690 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH
OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV / LED LCD TV /
PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
www.lg.com
Separate purchase
Wall Mounting Bracket
LSW100B or
LSW100BG
(32LE5***,
32LE7***,
32LD6***,
32LD7***,
32LD8***)
AW-50PG60MS
LSW200B or
LSW200BG
LSW400B or
LSW400BG
(37/42/47LE5***,
37/42/47LE7***,
42/47LE8***,
37/42/47LD6***,
42/47LD7***,
37/42LD8***)
(55LE5***,
55LE7***,
55LE8***,
55LD6***)
AW-50PG60M AW-60PG60MS
or
AW-60PG60M
or
(50PK5**, 50PK7***, 50PK9***)
(60PK5**, 60PK7***, 60PK9***)
Optional extras can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
This device only works with compatible LG LED LCD TV, LCD TV, or Plasma TV.
Wireless Media Box
AV1
AV2
COM
RGB
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
WIRELESS
CONTROL
HDMI 4
Wireless LAN for
Broadband/
DLNA Adaptor
WIRELESS
OUT
(Except for
50/60PK950,
50/60PK950N,
50/60PK980,
50/60PK990)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
CONTENTS
LED LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***............ A-1
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47/55LD6***,
32/42/47LD7***.............................................. A-12
PLASMA TV Models : 50/60PK5**, 50/60PK7***,
50/60PK9*** .................................................. A-23
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Antenna Connection.............................................1
Connecting with a Component cable...................2
Connecting with an HDMI cable..........................3
Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable...............4
Connecting with a Euro Scart cable....................5
Usb setup.............................................................6
Connecting with AN RF Cable.............................6
Connecting with AN RCA cable...........................7
Connecting with a D-sub 15 pin cable.................8
Insertion of A CI Module.......................................9
Headphone Setup................................................9
Digital audio out Setup.......................................10
External Equipment WIreless Connection.........11
Supported Display Resolution............................12
Screen Setup for PC mode................................15
Network setup....................................................19
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Turning on the TV..............................................29
Initializing Setup ................................................29
Programme Selection.........................................29
Volume Adjustment............................................29
Quick Menu........................................................30
On Screen Menus Selection and adjustment....31
Auto programme tuning ....................................33
Cable DTV setting..............................................38
Manual programme Tuning................................39
Programme Edit ................................................43
Booster...............................................................47
CI [Common Interface] Information....................48
Software Update................................................49
Picture/Sound test..............................................51
CONTENTS
PREPARATION
Signal Test..........................................................52
Product/service information...............................53
Network Test.......................................................53
Simple Manual...................................................54
Selecting the Programme List............................55
Input List.............................................................57
Input Label.........................................................58
Data Service.......................................................59
MHP Service......................................................60
SIMPLINK...........................................................62
AV Mode.............................................................66
Initializing(Reset to original factory settings).....67
NETCAST
Legal Notice.......................................................68
Netcast Menu.....................................................70
YOUTUBE..........................................................71
AccuWeather......................................................73
picasa.................................................................74
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth? .........................................................76
Setting the Bluetooth..........................................77
Bluetooth headset .............................................78
Remove the bluetooth device............................82
My Bluetooth Information...................................83
Receiving photos from external Bluetooth device.. 84
Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth
device.................................................................85
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
When connecting a USB device........................86
CIFS (Common Internet File System)...............88
DLNA..................................................................92
Movie list............................................................96
Photo list...........................................................107
Music list...........................................................117
DivX Registration Code....................................126
Deactivation......................................................127
I
CONTENTS
GAME
CONTENTS
Game................................................................128
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME
GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Switch on/off EPG............................................130
Select a programme.........................................130
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode..130
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode............131
Button Function in Date Change Mode...........132
Button Function in Extended Description Box.132
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode.. 133
Button Function in Schedule List Mode...........134
PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control.................135
Picture Wizard..................................................137
Energy Saving..................................................138
Preset Picture Settings....................................139
Manual Picture Adjustment..............................141
Picture Improvement Technology.....................143
Expert Picture Control......................................144
Picture Reset....................................................147
Trumotion.........................................................148
LED LOCAL DIMMING....................................149
Power Indicator................................................150
Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method.....151
Mode Setting....................................................152
Demo Mode......................................................153
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Auto Volume Leveler........................................154
Clear Voice II....................................................155
Preset Sound Settings-Sound Mode...............156
Sound Setting Adjustment -User Mode...........157
Infinite Sound...................................................157
Balance............................................................158
TV Speakers On/ Off Setup.............................159
DTV Audio Setting (in digital mode only).........160
Selecting Digital Audio out...............................161
Audio Reset......................................................162
II
Audio Description (In digital mode only)..........163
I/II
- Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only).164
- NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only).165
- Speaker Sound Output Selection..................165
On-Screen Menu Language / Country Selection.166
Language Selection.........................................167
TIME SETTING
Clock Setup......................................................169
Auto on/off time setting....................................170
Sleep Timer setting..........................................171
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System.........................172
Block Programme.............................................173
Parental Control (In Digital Mode only)............174
External Input Blocking....................................175
Key Lock..........................................................176
TELETEXT
Switch on/off ...................................................177
SIMPLE Text....................................................177
TOP Text..........................................................178
FASTEXT.........................................................178
Special Teletext Functions...............................179
DIGITAL TELETEXT
Teletext within Digital Service..........................180
Teletext in Digital Service.................................180
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting................................................181
Maintenance.....................................................183
Product Specifications ....................................184
IR Codes..........................................................201
External Control Device Setup.........................202
Open source software notice...........................209
PREPARATION
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
EN
ER
GY
SAVI
NG
7pq
0
MA
NU
MU
TE
8 tu
RK
CH FAV
AR
RA /NUM
TIO
LE
TE
OK
MO
DE
LIG
HT
INPU
2 ab
c
l
9 wxy
6m
3d
TV
RA /
D
ef
no
Cable Holder
z
Q.V
IEW
P
E
Q.M
AV
T
5 jk
v
[
T
ME
hi
rs
LIS
DE
1.,;@
4g
A
G
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV MODELS : 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***
ACCESSORIES
P
EN
U
BA
CK
GU
ID
E
EX
IT
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
IN
FO
AD
AP
P/*
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
Remote Control
1-screw for stand fixing
(Only 32LE5***)
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polishing cloth.
Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with
the cleansing cloths(mitt) for the product exterior if
there is stain or fingerprint on surface of the exterior.
Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive
Polishing cloth for force. This may cause
use on the screen. scratching or discolouration.
(Only 32/37/42/47LE5***,
32/37/42/47LE7***)
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one
direction after spraying water 1~2 times on cleansing
cloths. Please remove excessive moisture after cleaning.
Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame.
(Only 55LE5***,
55LE7***)
(Only 42/47/55LE8***)
x8
x8
(M4 x 16)
(M4 x 20)
cleansing cloths(mitt)
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE7***)
x4
(M4 x 24) (M4 x 16)
Bolts for stand assembly
x2
x4
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the
electromagnetic wave when connecting
the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core
to the power plug, the better it is.
Ferrite Core
(This
item
is not included
Install the power plug closely.
for all models.)
A-1
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
PREPARATION
►TV
► can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
►►Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
►►Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
OK
PROGRAMME VOLUME
A-2
INPUT
MENU
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
POWER
Only 42/47/55LE8***
PREPARATION
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
MENU
OK
POWER
INPUT
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.)
A-3
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
13
1
14
2
3
4
5
6
6
11
15
7
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A-4
CAUTION
8 9
10
11
►►Use a product with the following
thickness for optimal connection to
HDMI cable (Only HDMI IN 4) /
USB device.
*A 10 mm
12
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
LAN
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
8
9
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
10
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices connected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
11
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
12
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
13
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
14
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
15
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
STAND INSTALLATION
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
4
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.
Stand Rear
Cover
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
5
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
M4 X 16
M4 X 16
M4 X 20
(Only
(Only 42/47/55LE8***)
32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LE7***)
M4 X 20
(Only 32/37/42/47LE5***, (Only 42/47/55LE8***)
32/37/42/47LE7***)
Stand Body
M4 X 24
(Only 55LE5***,
55LE7***)
3
Stand Base
Assemble the TV as shown.
A-5
PREPARATION
ATTACHING THE TV TO A
DESK
(Only 32LE5***)
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only
an attached screw.
BACK COVER FOR
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
1
Secure the power cord with the Cable
Holder on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
Cable Holder
1-Screw (provided as parts of the product)
2
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle
the cables.
Stand
Desk
WARNING
►To
► prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the machine may cause injury.
Cable Holder
SWIVEL STAND
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
A-6
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
he TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
T
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE
►►The Kensington Security System is an optional
accessory.
►►If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
►►Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
►►Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary distortion
effects on the screen.
■■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
1
1
2
2
1
2
PREPARATION
■■ This feature is not available for all models.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
3
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
NOTE
►►When moving the TV undo the cords first.
►►Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
►►To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-7
PREPARATION
■■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
PREPARATION
EARTHING
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
Circuit
breaker
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
NOTE
►Should
►
Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor.
►Should
►
use a special wall mount, if you want
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
►The
►
surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing
►
screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
►LG
► is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installation:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause personal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
10 cm
10 cm
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
10 cm
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
■■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting bracket which supports VESA standard.
■■ LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
A-8
Model
32LE5***
37/42/47LE5***
55LE5***
32LE7***
37/42/47LE7***
55LE7***
42/47LE8***
55LE8***
VESA Standard Quantity
(A * B) Screw
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
200 * 200 M6
4
4
400 * 400 M6
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
(POWER) Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
ENERGY Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
SAVING
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
PREPARATION
LIGHT You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(► p.57)
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.(► p.31)
NetCast Select the desired NetCast menu source. (► p.68)
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio Language, Sleep Timer, Skip Off/On, USB
Device).(► p.30)
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
(Up/Down/Left/Right) adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
GUIDE Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
APP/* Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE58**, 32/37/42/47/55LE78**,
42/47/55LE88**)
A-9
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
]
(Space) Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST Displays the programme table. (► p.55)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
buttons models only), Programme edit.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
@ Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-10
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List).
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones.
■■ Close cover.
■■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-11
PREPARATION
LCD TV MODELS : 32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***
PREPARATION
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
EN
ER
GY
AV
SAVI
NG
7pq
T
0
MA
ME
NU
MU
DE
TE
4g
hi
8 tu
RK
CH FAV
AR
RA /NUM
TIO
LE
TE
Q.M
DE
INPU
2 ab
c
l
9 wxy
6m
TV
RA /
D
3d
ef
no
z
Q.V
IEW
P
E
OK
MO
T
5 jk
v
[
LIS
rs
1.,;@
A
G
P
EN
U
BA
CK
GU
ID
E
EX
IT
IN
FO
AD
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
AP
P/*
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
Ferrite Core
(This item is not included
for all models.)
Remote Control
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polishing cloth.
Power Cord
Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive
Polishing cloth for force. This may cause
use on the screen. scratching or discolouration.
x8
(M4x20)
Bolts for stand assembly
1-screw for stand fixing
(Only 32/37/42LD6***,
32/42LD7***)
Protection cover
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power
plug, the better it is.
Install the power plug closely.
A-12
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
CAUTION
PREPARATION
►TV
► can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
►►Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
►►Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42/47/55LD6***
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
A-13
PREPARATION
Only 32/42/47LD7***
PREPARATION
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.)
A-14
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
1
2
3
4
5
6
PREPARATION
12
13
7
14
15
7
1
2
3
8
9
10
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
LAN
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
11
8
9
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
11
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
12
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
13
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
5
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
14
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
15
7
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices connected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
10
4
6
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
socket.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
A-15
PREPARATION
STAND INSTALLATION
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check
whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened
fully, the product can tilt forward after the product
installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive
force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the
tightening part of the bolt.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
Stand Body
BACK COVER FOR
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
1
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the
External Equipment Setup section.
2
Open the Cable Management Clip as
shown.
Stand Base
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
Cable Management Clip
3
4
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
NOTE
5
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV. (Only 32/42/47LD7***)
Stand Rear
Cover
A-16
►Do
► not use the Cable Management Clip to lift
the TV.
-If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the
TV may be damaged.
SWIVEL STAND
(Only 32/37/42LD6***, 32/42LD7***)
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only
an attached screw.
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
ATTACHING THE TV TO A
DESK
1-Screw (provided as parts of the product)
NOT USING THE
DESK-TYPE STAND
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the
protection cover.
Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until
clicking sound.
Stand
Desk
WARNING
►To
► prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the machine may cause injury.
Protection Cover
A-17
PREPARATION
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
PREPARATION
■■ This feature is not available for all models.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
he TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
T
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE
►►The Kensington Security System is an optional
accessory.
►►If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
►►Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
►►Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary distortion
effects on the screen.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
■■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
1
1
2
2
1
2
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
3
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
NOTE
►►When moving the TV undo the cords first.
►►Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
►►To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-18
■■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
Circuit
breaker
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
►Should
►
Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor.
►Should
►
use a special wall mount, if you want
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
►The
►
surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing
►
screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
►LG
► is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installation:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause personal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
10 cm
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
PREPARATION
EARTHING
NOTE
10 cm
10 cm
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
■■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting bracket which supports VESA standard.
■■ LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
Model
32LD6***
37/42/47LD6***
55LD6***
32LD7***
42/47LD7***
VESA Standard Quantity
(A * B) Screw
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
A-19
PREPARATION
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
PREPARATION
(POWER) Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
ENERGY Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
SAVING
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(► p.57)
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.(► p.31)
NetCast Select the desired NetCast menu source. (► p.68)
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio Language, Sleep Timer, Skip Off/On, USB
Device).(► p.30)
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
(Up/Down/Left/Right) adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
GUIDE Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
A-20
APP/* Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LD68**, 32/42/47LD78**)
]
(Space) Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
LIST Displays the programme table. (► p.55)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
buttons models only), Programme edit.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
@ Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-21
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List).
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones.
■■ Close cover.
■■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-22
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LIGHT
ENERGY
AV MODE
LIGHT
INPUT
ENERGY
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/
RAD
TV/
RAD
SAVING
SAVING
1.,;@ 2 abc 3 def
1.,;@ 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
0
[
LIST
7pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
LIST
Q.VIEW
MARK
RATIO
P
RATIO
MENU
OK
Q.MENU
OK
x2
BACK GUIDE EXIT
BACK GUIDE EXIT
FREEZE
Owner’s Manual
P
A
G
E
MUTE
Q.MENU
AD
P
DELETE
MUTE
INFO
Q.VIEW
FAV
CHAR/NUM
P
A
G
E
DELETE
MENU
0
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
[
7pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
PREPARATION
PLASMA TV MODELS : 50/60PK5**, 50/60PK7***, 50/60PK9***
ACCESSORIES
FREEZE
INFO
APP/*
(Except for 50/60PK9***)
AD
APP/*
(Only 50/60PK9***)
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Power Cord
Remote Control
Batteries (AAA)
x2
Wireless LAN for
Broadband
/DLNA Adaptor
Cable Holder
(Only 50/60PK950,
50/60PK950N, 50/60PK980,
50/60PK990)
x4
x3
M5x14
M4x28
(Only 50PK5**)
x4
Cable
Management Clip
(Only 50/60PK7***,
50/60PK9***)
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polishing cloth.
x4
M4x14
M4x28
(Only 50PK7***, 50PK9***)
Bolts for stand assembly
Ferrite core can be used to
reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the
power plug.
Ferrite Core
The closer the location of the
(This item is not ferrite core to the power plug,
included for all the better it is.
models.)
Protection
Cover
Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive
Polishing cloth for force. This may cause
use on the screen. scratching or discolouration.
Ferrite Core
(This item is not
included for all
models.)
Ferrite core can be used to
reduce the electromagnetic wave
when connecting the LAN cable.
Place the ferrite core far from
TV and wind the LAN cable in
the ferrite core once.
Install the power
plug closely.
A-23
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
PREPARATION
►TV
► can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
►►Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
►►Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 50/60PK5**
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the surrounding
conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The lighting is off while the TV remains on.
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
POWER
A-24
INPUT
MENU
OK
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
Only 50/60PK7***, 50/60PK9***
PREPARATION
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the
surrounding conditions
Remote Control
Sensor
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The lighting is off while the TV remains on.
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
POWER
INPUT
MENU
OK
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
A-25
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
PREPARATION
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
8
14
8
9
10
11
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. Never
attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
7
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
2
LAN
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
8
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
9
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
10
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
11
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
12
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
3
4
5
6
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices connected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
13
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
14
A-26
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT.
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
STAND INSTALLATION
Only 50PK5**
Only 50PK7***, 50PK9***
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
2
Set the Stand Base on even floor.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body
with the Stand Base of the TV.
2
Set the Stand Base on even floor.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body
with the Stand Base of the TV.
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.
Stand Body
M5x14
Stand Body
M4x14
Stand Base
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
Stand Base
3
Assemble the parts of the Cable
Management Clip with the Stand Body.
Cable
Management
Clip
4
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
Stand Body
4
Assemble the TV as shown.
5
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
M4x28
Front
When assembling the stand,
make sure to distinguish and
assemble the front and rear
side of the stand correctly.
M4x28
A-27
PREPARATION
BACK COVER FOR
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables.
In case of the LAN cable, install as shown
to reduce the electromagnetic wave.
Cable Holder
Only 50/60PK7***, 50/60PK9***
1
Connect the cables as necessary. To connect additional equipment, see the
External Equipment Setup section.
2
Install the Cable Management Clip into
the TV until clicking sound.
NOTE
►Do
► not use the Cable Management Clip to
lift the TV.
-If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or
the TV may be damaged.
A-28
HOW TO REMOVE THE
CABLE MANAGEMENT
CLIP
Only 50/60PK7***, 50/60PK9***
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Hold the Cable Management Clip with both
hands and pull it backward as shown.
NOT USING THE DESKTYPE STAND
Insert the Protection
Cover into the TV until
clicking sound.
■■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
SWIVEL STAND
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
1
1
Protection Cover
(Fix a Guide to the Outsides.)
2
1
2
PREPARATION
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the
protection cover.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
2
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
3
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
NOTE
►►When moving the TV undo the cords first.
►►Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
►►To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-29
PREPARATION
■■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
PREPARATION
EARTHING
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power Supply
Circuit breaker
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
NOTE
►Should
►
Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor.
►Should
►
use a special wall mount, if you want
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
►The
►
surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing
►
screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
►LG
► is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installation:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause personal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
10 cm
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
■■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting bracket which supports VESA standard.
■■ LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.
A-30
Model
50PK5**
60PK5**
50PK7***
60PK7***
50PK9***
60PK9***
VESA Standard Quantity
(A * B) Screw
4
400 * 400 M6
4
600 * 400 M8
4
400 * 400 M6
4
600 * 400 M8
4
400 * 400 M6
4
600 * 400 M8
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
LIGHT You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
SAVING
PREPARATION
(POWER) Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(► p.57)
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.(► p.31)
NetCast Select the desired NetCast menu source. (► p.68)
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio Language, Sleep Timer, Skip Off/On, USB
Device).(► p.30)
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
(Up/Down/Left/Right) adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
GUIDE Shows programme guide.(► p.129)
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
AD Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
APP/* Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Only 50/60PK78**, 50/60PK98**)
A-31
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
]
(Space) Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST Displays the programme table. (► p.55)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
buttons models only), Programme edit.
FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen. (It doesn't
work at USB Mode and Simplink.)
The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if
no signal is received or no operation is performed
for 5 minutes.
If you keep the screen in Freeze condition, the
residual image can exist.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
@ Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►
p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-32
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
MY MEDIA Music List and Movie List).
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones.
■■ Close cover.
■■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-33
PREPARATION
Simple Remote Control (Only 50/60PK9***)
PREPARATION
(POWER) Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
TV/INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.(► p.57)
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Installing Batteries
■■ Open the battery compartment cover
on the back and install the batteries
matching correct polarity (+with
+,-with -).
■■ Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Do not
mix old or used batteries with new
ones.
■■ Close cover.
■■ To remove the batteries, perform the
installation actions in reverse.
A-34
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■■ To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
ANTENNA CONNECTION
■■ For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.
■■ An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.
Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
(Connect to wall antenna socket)
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wall
Antenna
Socket
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
UHF
Antenna
Signal
Amplifier
VHF
■■ In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier
to the antenna as shown above.
■■ If signal needs to be split for two TVs, use an antenna signal splitter for connection.
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■■ To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting
all equipment.
■■ This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the
32/37/42/47/55LE7*** models.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do
receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as
shown below.
1
2
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the
external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD,
etc.) to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on
the TV.
1
Connect the audio output of the external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD, etc.) to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
3
Turn on the external equipment.
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for
operating instructions.)
4
Select the Component1 input source using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
If connected to COMPONENT IN 2, select
Component2 input source.
2
or
►►HDMI Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM.
DTS Audio format is not supported.
Signal
Component
HDMI
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p/1080i
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
1080p
O
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
1
2
(24 Hz / 30 Hz /
50 Hz / 60 Hz)
Component Input ports
To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.
Component ports on the TV
Y
PB
PR
Video output ports
on DVD player
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
PB
B-Y
Cb
Pb
PR
R-Y
Cr
Pr
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI CABLE
Connect the HDMI output of the external equipment (digital settop box, DVD, etc.) to HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI), HDMI/DVI IN 2,
HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 (Except for 32/37/42/47/55LD6***,
32/42/47LD7***) jack on the TV.
2
Turn on the external equipment.
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating
instructions.)
3
Select HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 (Except for
32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***) input source using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
1
NOTE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
►The
►
TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously
when using an HDMI cable.
►If
► the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the
output resolution appropriately.
►Check
►
that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If
the HDMI cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering
or no screen display can result. Please use the High Speed
HDMI Cable.
3
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI TO DVI CABLE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
4
1
Connect the digital set-top box or the DVI output of the PC to HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI) jack on
the TV.
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box or the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the digital set-top box or the PC and
the TV.
(Refer to the digital set-top box or the PC
manual for operating instructions.)
4
Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT
button on the remote control.
1
2
or
CONNECTING WITH A EURO SCART CABLE
Connect the Euro scart socket of the external
equipment (DVD, VCR, etc.) to the AV1 Euro
scart socket on the TV.
2
Turn on the external equipment.
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for
operating instructions.)
3
Select AV1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
Input
Output
Scart
Video
Audio
RGB
Video, Audio
AV1
O
O
O
Analogue TV, Digital TV
Output Type
AV1
AV1
(TV Out)
(When DTV scheduled recording is in
progress using recording equipment.)
Digital TV
Digital TV
O
Current
input mode
1
Analogue TV, AV
Analogue TV
Component/RGB
Analogue TV
(The input mode is converted to DTV.)
HDMI
X
X
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
►►TV Out : Outputs Analogue TV
or Digital TV signals.
O
NOTE
►►Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded.
5
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
USB SETUP
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1 or
USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
2
After connecting the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2
jack, you use the USB function. (► p.86)
1
or
CONNECTING WITH AN RF CABLE
To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.
1
Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to
the ANTENNA IN socket on the TV.
1
2
onnect the antenna cable to the ANT IN
C
socket of the VCR.
3
Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match
the appropriate channel between the TV and
VCR for viewing.
2
Wall Jack
Antenna
6
CONNECTING WITH AN RCA CABLE
1
1
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press
PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s
manual.)
Or, Operate the corresponding external equipment.
(Refer to external equipment operating guide.)
3
Select AV2 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
If connected to AV IN 3, select AV3 input
source.
or
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
2
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and VCR or external equipment. Match the
jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left =
white, and Audio Right = red)
NOTE
►►If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from
the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.
Video Game Set
Camcorder
or
1
or
Camcorder
Video Game Set
7
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH A D-SUB 15 PIN CABLE
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's settings.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
8
1
Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB
IN (PC) jack on the TV.
2
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the PC and the TV
4
Select RGB input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
2
1
INSERTION OF A CI MODULE
To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV mode.
This feature is not available in all countries.
1
For further information, see p.48.
NOTE
►►Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot
in the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly,
this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot.
Check this point as
shown and insert the CI
Module.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA (Personal
Computer Memory Card International
Association) CARD SLOT of TV as shown.
HEADPHONE SETUP
(Except for 50/60PK5**, 50/60PK7***, 50/60PK9***)
You can listen the sound through the headphone.
1
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
2
To adjust the headphone volume, press the
+ or - button. If you press the MUTE button,
the sound from the headphone is switched off.
NOTE
►►AUDIO menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone.
►►When changing AV MODE with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
►►Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone.
►Headphone
►
impedance: 16 Ω
►Max
►
audio output of headphone: 10 mW to 15 mW
9
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP
Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV
Digital Audio (Optical) Output port.
2
onnect the other end of the optical cable to
C
the digital audio (Optical) input on the audio
equipment.
3
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the
AUDIO menu.(►p.159). Refer to the external
audio equipment instruction manual for operation.
CAUTION
►►Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser
beam may damage your vision.
10
1
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold
separately. When you connect the Wireless Ready Dongle (included with the Wireless Media Box) to the
TV, external devices can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to
the TV wirelessly.
1
2
Connect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the
Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS
CONTROL jack on the TV.
Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless
Ready Dongle to the HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI),
HDMI/DVI IN 2, HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4
(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LD6***,
32/42/47LD7***) jack on the TV.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
After the wireless is connected, press the INPUT button to view the wireless input screen.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions.
LG Wireless Media Box
NOTE
►WIRELESS
►
CONTROL : Wireless Ready Dongle power supply and control usage.
►HDMI
►
: Video/Audio signal is connected in Wireless Ready Dongle.
►When
►
you connect to the Wireless Media Box (Separately sold product), you can watch the
external device connected to the Wireless Media Box through wireless connection.
►►When using the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box, some functions of the TV.
►►In wireless external output, Real Cinema and Digital Noise Reduction functions are not supported.
11
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SUPPORTED DISPLAY RESOLUTION
Plasma TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
12
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
720x400
31.468
70.08
640x480
31.469
59.94
800x600
37.879
60.31
1024x768
48.363
60.00
1280x768
47.78
59.87
1360x768
47.72
59.80
45
60
1280x1024
63.981
60.02
33.72
59.94
66.587
59.93
33.75
60
28.125
50
67.5
60.00
26.97
23.97
27
24
33.716
29.976
33.75
30.00
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
Resolution
720x480
720x576
1280x720
1920x1080
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
31.469
59.94
31.5
60
31.25
50
37.5
50
44.96
59.94
56.25
50
67.43
59.94
67.5
60
LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
720x400
31.468
70.08
640x480
31.469
59.94
Resolution
720x480
Horizontal
Frequency
(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
31.469
59.94
31.5
60
31.25
50
37.5
50
800x600
37.879
60.31
1024x768
48.363
60.00
1280x768
47.78
59.87
44.96
59.94
1360x768
47.72
59.80
45
60
1280x1024
63.981
60.02
33.72
59.94
66.587
59.93
33.75
60
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
67.5
720x576
1280x720
60.00
1920x1080
28.125
50
26.97
23.97
27
24
33.716
29.976
33.75
30.00
56.25
50
67.43
59.94
67.5
60
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Resolution
13
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
14
►►Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen
for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image
may become permanently imprinted on the
screen; use a screen saver when possible.
►►There may be interference relating to resolution,
vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC
mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution
or change the refresh rate to another rate or
adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu
until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the
PC graphic card can not be changed, change the
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of
the PC graphic card.
►►The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal
and Vertical frequencies are separate.
►►We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz for the
PC mode, this should provide the best picture
quality.
►►Connect the signal cable from the monitor output
port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or
the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the
PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the
TV.
►►Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio
input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with
the TV).
►►If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as required.
►►If the graphic card on the PC does not output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only
one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to
display the PC output on the TV.
►►If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue
and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either
RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and
Play automatically by the TV.)
►►DOS mode may not work depending on the video
card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
►►If you use too long an RGB-PC cable, there may be
interference on the screen. We recommend using
under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture
quality.
SCREEN SETUP FOR PC MODE
Screen Reset
Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
SCREEN
OK
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
Auto Config.
Position
Size
• Picture Reset
►
: Off
Screen
•• Screen
Prev.
Resolution
• Advanced Control
• TruMotion
Move
To Set
Yes
No
Phase
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Reset.
Select Yes.
Run Reset.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
15
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)
Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the
image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Auto configure
This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image
will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
SCREEN
OK
Resolution
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
• Advanced Control
►
: Off
Screen
•• Screen
Auto Config.
Position
Size
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion
Prev.
Move
Auto Config.
Yes
No
Phase
Reset
1
2
3
4
5
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
• If the position of the image is still not correct,
try Auto adjustment again.
• If picture needs to be adjusted again after
Auto adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust
the Position, Size or Phase.
Select Auto Config..
Select Yes.
Run Auto Config..
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
16
Selecting Resolution
To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
SCREEN
OK
Resolution
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
• Advanced Control
►
: Off
Screen
•• Screen
Position
Prev.
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
1360 x 768
Size
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion
Auto Config.
Move
Phase
Reset
1
2
3
4
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Resolution.
Select the desired resolution.
5
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
17
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
SCREEN
OK
Auto Config.
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
3
4
Phase
: Off
Screen
•• Screen
2
Position
Size
• Picture Reset
1
Prev.
Resolution
• Advanced Control
• TruMotion
Move
►
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust
the picture position manually.
Reset
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Position, Size or Phase.
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
18
NETWORK SETUP
Wired Network Connection
This TV can be connected to a local area network (LAN) via the LAN port. After making the physical
connection, the TV needs to be set up for network communication.
Broadband Modem
Broadband Service
Router
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Broadband Modem
Broadband Service
1
Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN
port on the TV.
2
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
3
After connecting the LAN port, use the NetCast menu.
For more information about NETCAST setup and troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.com. Search for
NetCast.
CAUTION
►Do
► not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port.
►Since
►
there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your
telecommunication carrier or internet service provider.
19
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wired Network Setup
NETWORK
Move
•Network
•Network Setting
Setting :: Wired
Wired
• Network Status
OK
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
Network Type
►
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
If wired and wireless networks are both available, wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small number of home networks may require the TV network
settings to be adjusted.
For detail information, contact your internet provider or router manual.
If you already set
the Network Setting
: Internet is connected
Wired network is recommended
•Legal Notice
Wired
OK
Wireless
Resetting
ꔉ Next
Appeared when
wired and wireless
are simultaneously
connected.
IP Auto Setting
Network Setting
IP Manual Setting
Network Setting
Network Status
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
TV
Network connecting
Setting
Test
●
IP Address
● Subnet
Mask
1
2
3
4
5
IP Mode
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
IP Address
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● Subnet
Mask
◄ IP Manual Setting ►
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
DNS Server
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
DNS Server
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
OK
Close
OK
Exit
Previous
Exit
Select NETWORK.
Select Network Setting.
Select Wired.
If you already set Network Setting: Select Resetting. The new connection settings
resets the current network settings.
Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting.
When Selecting IP Manual Setting:
IP addresses will need to be input manually.
6
Insert the IP address.
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
Previous
20
Exit
Select OK.
■■ This feature requires an always-on broadband internet connection.
■■ You do not need to connect to a PC to use this function.
■■ If Network Setting is not working, check your network conditions. Check the LAN cable and
make sure your router has DHCP turned on if you wish to use the Auto Setting.
■■ If the Network Setting is not completed, network may not operate normally.
■■ IP Manual Setting: Select it if there is no DHCP server on the network and you want to set the IP
address manually.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■■ IP Auto Setting: Select it if there is a DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) via wired
connection, the TV will automatically be allocated an IP address. If you’re using a broadband
router or broadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. The IP address will automatically be determined.
21
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
22
►For more information about Netcast setup and
troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.
com. Search for Netcast.
►Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5
or better with a RJ45 connector.
►Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router
or modem. After connecting the player to the
home network, quickly power off and/or disconnect the power cable of the home network
router or cable modem. Then power on and/or
connect the power cable again.
►Depending on the internet service provider
(ISP), the number of devices that can receive
internet service may be limited by the applicable terms of service. For details, contact your
ISP.
►LG is not responsible for any malfunction of
the TV and/or the internet connection feature
due to communication errors/malfunctions
associated with your broadband internet connection, or other connected equipment.
►LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
►Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the TV.
If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
►You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
►Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by
the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying
your broadband Internet connection.
►Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your responsibility.
►A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is
required for connection to this TV. If your internet
service does not allow for such a connection,
you will not be able to connect the TV.
►A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with your
ISP, you may not be able to use the internet
connection feature contained in this TV or you
may be limited to the number of devices you
can connect at the same time. (If your ISP lim-
its sub-scription to one device, this TV may not
be allowed to connect when a PC is already
connected.)
►The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or its
usage may be limited depending on the policies and restrictions of your ISP. For details,
contact your ISP directly.
►The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless telephone, Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven,
and can be affected by interference from them.
It can be interrupted by the device using 5 Ghz
radio frequencies. It is same device with LG
wireless media box, cordless telephone, other
Wi-Fi device.
►It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless condition.
►Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may generate network traffic.
►In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
►The reception quality over wireless depends
on many factors such as type of the access
point, distance between the TV and access
point, and the location of the TV.
► When connecting internet through the wired/
wireless sharing machine, it may interrupt the
connection because of the use limitation and
confirmation of service company.
►To
► connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs
to be activated. Please enquire to the AP
supplier for the possibility of AP wireless connections.
►Please
►
verify the security settings of AP SSID
for wireless AP connection, and enquire to
the AP supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
►The
►
TV can become slower or malfunction
with wrong settings of network equipments
(wired/wireless router, hub, etc). Please
install correctly by referring to the manual of
the equipment, and set the network.
Wireless Network Connection
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor, allows the TV to connect to a wireless lan
network.
The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and
the network environment. Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless
router for detailed connection steps and network settings.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the “LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
Adaptor” to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
2
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting, you can use the NetCast menu.
NOTE
►For
►
enjoying pictures, music, or video stored in the PC using the router, the use of wired port in
the router is recommended.
►When
►
the wireless port of the router is used, there may be restrictions for some functions.
23
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wireless Network Setup
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the network.
Move
•Network
•Network Setting
Setting :: Wired
Wired
• Network Status
If you already set the
Network Setting
OK
Network Type
: Internet is connected
Wired network is recommended
•Legal Notice
Wired
Select the wireless network setting type
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
OK
Wireless
Setting Ad-hoc network
Resetting
ꔉ Next
Exit
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
Appeared when wired and wireless
are simultaneously connected.
If your AP is locked
Network Setting
Inserting the security key
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
●
IP Address
● Subnet
Mask
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
DNS Server
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
2
3
4
5
Page 1/1
Insert 8~63 ASCII characters.
◄ ►
IPTIME
iptime
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Gateway
1
Select AP you want to connect.
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
Previous
Selecting AP
Insert the security key of AP.
ASW
Network1
OK
OK
24
Select the wireless network setting type.
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
►
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NETWORK
Access Point
Search
Connecting with PIN mode
Cancel
ꔉ Next
Exit
Exit
Prev.
Select NETWORK.
Select Network Setting.
Select Wireless.
If you already set Network Setting:
Select Resetting.
The new connection settings resets
the current network settings.
Select Setting from the AP list.
Previous
Exit
6
Scan the all available AP (Access
Point) or wireless routers within range
and display them as a list.
7
Select an AP (Access Point) or
wireless router on the list.
(If your AP is locked, insert the
security key of AP).
8
9
Input the security key of AP.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
When a security code is already set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
If you want to connect the AP (Access Point) or router with PIN, use this feature.
Selecting AP
Connecting with PIN mode
Select AP you want to connect.
Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and
press ‘Connect’ button.
IPTIME
PIN NUMBER : 12345670
iptime
ASW
Network1
Connect
Access Point
Search
For more information, check the AP manual.
ꔉ Next
Connecting with PIN mode
ꔉ Next
Previous
1
2
4
5
Exit
Exit
Repeat step 1-6 on P.24.
RED
3
Previous
Connect the access point with PIN
mode.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.
■■ PIN number is the unique 8 digit number
of the dongle.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Page 1/1
Select Connect.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
25
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
If your access point or wireless router that supports PIN or WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it’s available
to use your access point or wireless router within 120 counts. You do not need to know the access
point name (SSID: Service Set Identifier) and security code of your access point or wireless router.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Press PBC mode button of AP and press ‘Connect’ button.
Setting from the AP list
Connect
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Caution: Check if PBC mode button is available for your AP.
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
ꔉ Next
Previous
1
2
3
4
26
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Exit
Previous
Repeat step 1-4 on P.24.
Select Simple setting (WPS-button mode).
Select Connect.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
Exit
AD-hoc Mode
This is the method of communicating directly with the machine to communicate without AP.
This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross cable.
Setting Ad-hoc network
Setting AD-hoc network
Select the wireless network setting type.
Features using exiting network can be unavailable. Do you
Setting from the AP list
want to change network connection?
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Exit
Cancel
Changing the setting information.
ꔉ Next
ꔉ Next
Previous
Network ID(SSID) : LGTV0
Security Key : 3333333333
OK
Setting Ad-hoc network
Insert the setting informatin into the device.
Previous
Connect
Exit
Previous
1
2
3
4
Repeat step 1-3 on P.24.
ꔉ Next
Exit
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select Setting Ad-hoc network.
Select OK.
Select Connect to connect Ad-hoc network.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key on your
TV screen.
Enter this Network ID and Security Key to your device.
If a network may not operate, change the setting
information using the RED button.
27
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Network Status
Network Status
NETWORK
Move
OK
TV
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
•Network Setting : Wired
•• Network
Network Status
Status
: Not connected
: Internet
is connected
Network connecting
•Legal Notice
Setting
Test
Close
Select the wireless network setting type.
Network Setting
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the IP setting mode.
IP Mode
●
IP Address
● Subnet
Mask
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
●
DNS Server
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
Wireless Connection
OK
Previous
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Exit
Wired Connection
1
2
3
28
Select NETWORK.
Select Network Status.
Check the network status.
■■ Setting: Return to the network setting
menu or wireless network setting type
menu.
■■ Test: Test the current network status
after setting the network.
■■ Close: Return to the previous menu.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.
Firstly, connect the power cord correctly.
At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.
2
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT or P
button on the TV or press
the POWER, INPUT, P
or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will
switch on.
INITIALIZING SETUP
1
If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can adjust
the Language, Mode Setting, Power Indicator(When you select Home Use from Mode
Setting-Only LED LCD TV models), Country(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE59**,
32/37/42/47/55LE79**, 42/47/55LE89**, 32/37/42/47/55LD69**, 32/42/47LD79**, 32/37/42LD89**,
50/60PK59*, 50/60PK79**, 50/60PK99**) or Set Password(When France is selected for
Country), Auto Tuning.
Note:
a.If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again.
b.Press the BACK button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.
c.For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might
not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.
d."Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.
e."Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality data,
“Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time.
f.The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the
OPTION menu.
g. When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ but ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
PROGRAMME SELECTION
1
Press the P
or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number.
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
1
Press the
2
If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE,
+ , - or AV Mode button.
29
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
QUICK MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture format.
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to
Q.Menu.
Clear Voice II : By differentiating the human
sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
Picture Mode : Selects your desired Picture
Mode.
Sound Mode : It is a feature to automatically set the sound combination which it deems
the best for the images being watched.
Selects your desired Sound Mode.
◄
Aspect Ratio
Audio or Audio Language : Selects the
sound output.
Sleep Timer : Sets the sleep timer.
Skip Off/On : Selects the Skip Off/On.
USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject
USB device.
►
16:9
Exit
1
2
3
30
Display each menu.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the Q.MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
1
2
Select a menu item.
3
Move to the pop up menu.
NOTE
►It is possible to use ISM Method in Plasma TV models only.
►It is possible to use Backlight, Power Indicator in LCD TV/LED LCD TV models only.
►It is not possible to use CI Information in Analogue mode.
SETUP
● Auto
SETUP
Move
● Manual
PICTURE
Tuning
● Programme
Edit
● Booster
● CI
Move
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
: Off
● Sound
Mode
Wizard
Move
OK
: 16:9
Energy Saving : Off
Mode
TIME
OK
: Off
● Balance
Ratio
● Picture
● Picture
Information
● Auto
● Aspect
●ꕊ
: Off
AUDIO
AUDIO
PICTURE
OK
Tuning
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
• Press the RED button, you can check the
Customer Support menu.
• Press the GREEN button, you can check
the Simple Manual menu.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to
normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the
previous menu screen.
Display each menu.
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
Move
OK
● Clock
TIME
3
0
: Standard
L
R
● Off
Time
: Off
● On
Time
: Off
● Sleep
Timer
: Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
31
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
LOCK
● Set
System
: Off
● Parental
● Input
Lock
● Country
OPTION
● Block
Programme
OK
: UK
● Disability Assistance
Guidance: Blocking Off
● Power
Block
Indicator
● Factory
: Off
● Set
● IR
Reset
ID
● Mode
:1
Setting
Blaster
: Home Use
: Off
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
● For further information, refer to the
optional “Wireless Media Box”
manual for operating instructions.
NETWORK
Move
NETWORK
• Network Status
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
•Network Setting : Wired
: Internet is connected
Bluetooth on
BLUETOOTH
Move
OK
Bluetooth is off.
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
•Legal Notice
(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***,
50/60PK5**)
GAME
MY MEDIA
GAME
MY MEDIA
Movie List
Photo List
Press OK(
Input List
Exit
Move
Antenna
USB1
USB2
AV1
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
AV2
OK
Component
HDMI4
Input Label
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,
32/37/42/47/55LD6***,
32/42/47LD7***, 50/60PK5**)
HOLE IN ONE
SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER
) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
INPUT
JUMP
WHACK A MOLE SUDOKU COOKING BURGER
Music List
Option
32
Move
● Language(Language)
● Key
OPTION
OK
Password
● Lock
LOCK
Move
Exit
URGENT SURVIVAL
Exit
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.
The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 1,000. But the number may differ slightly
depending on broadcasting signals.
If you want to select the Antenna,
SETUP
Move
● Manual
: Off
Antenna
Antenna
: Off
Antenna
Cable
Information
If you select antenna or cable,
existing channel information is
deleted.
Antenna
Cable
Close
1
2
3
4
5
Select SETUP.
Select Auto Tuning.
Select Antenna.
Select Start.
Run Auto tuning.
Antenna
Cable
Edit
● Booster
● CI
Information
OK
Please select your TV Connection.
Tuning
● Programme
Edit
● Booster
Move
● Auto
Tuning
● Auto
Tuning
● Manual
Tuning
● Programme
● CI
SETUP
OK
►
● Auto
Auto Tuning
Tuning
●
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
SECAM L Search
Automatic Numbering
Start
Close
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select
Start using the
button. Then, press
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning.
• SECAM L Search : Except for
32/37/42/47/55LE59**, 32/37/42/47/55LE79**,
42/47/55LE89**, 32/37/42/47/55LD69**,
32/42/47LD79**, 32/37/42LD89**,
50/60PK59*, 50/60PK79**, 50/60PK99**
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
DVB-T, DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable.
• In the following country, DVB cable can be used : Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland,
Denmark, Austria, Finland, Norway, Slovenia, Hungary.(The supported country can be added.)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
33
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
If you want to select the Cable,
SETUP
Move
● Manual
►
● Auto
Auto Tuning
Tuning
●
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
: Off
● Cable
Cable
DTV Setting
Move
● Auto
Tuning
● Auto
Tuning
● Manual
Tuning
● Programme
: Off
Antenna
Cable
Information
● Cable
DTV Setting
Antenna
Edit
● Booster
● CI
Information
SETUP
OK
Please select your TV Connection.
Tuning
● Programme
Edit
● Booster
Move
● Auto
Tuning
● Auto
Tuning
● Manual
Tuning
● Programme
● CI
SETUP
OK
● Booster
● CI
If you select antenna or cable,
existing channel information is
deleted.
Antenna
Edit
Service Operator
Comhem
Other Operators
Information
● Cable
OK
: Off
Previous
DTV Setting
Cable
Close
1
2
3
4
5
Select SETUP.
Select Auto Tuning.
Select Cable.
Select Comhem or Other
Operators.
Select Quick or Full.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
• When you select the Cable, the Cable
Service Operator selection screen can differ
or not exist by the Cable situation of the
applicable country.
• The popup window to select between
Service Operator is only shown initially for
the 3 cases when you accessing the
Initial Setting menu, when you change
from Antenna to Cable or when you
access the menu after changing the
Country.
• When you want to select between Service
Operator aside from the above 3 cases,
you can do so by selecting Setup->Cable
DTV Setting-> Service Operator.
• Acquired certification SO : Sweden(Comhem, Canal Digital), Denmark(YouSee, Canal Digital,
Stofa), Norway(Canal Digital).
• If there are not any Service Operator that you want, select Other Operators.
• If you select “Other Operators”, or the selected country supports “Other Operators” only, it may
take some time to search all the channels, or it may not search some of the channels.
If some of the channels do not appear, follow the steps below:
1. SETUP -> Auto Tuning -> Cable -> Setting
2. Switch Home Tuning from "Off" to "On"
3. Input additional values such as the frequency, symbol rate, modulation, and network ID.
(You can ask your cable service provider for the above information.)
34
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Next
■■When you select the Quick,
End Frequency(kHz)
: 862000
● Symbol
Network
: Auto
● Modulation
On
◄
362000
rate(kS/s)
6900
640QAM
End Frequency(kHz)
Network
0
OK
Start Frequency(kHz)
Close
End Frequency(kHz)
114000
862000
Setting
OK
Close
Cable
: 862000
: Auto
Auto
Setting
Cable
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
Skip Scramble Programme
Automatic Numbering
Start
Close
Reset
Close
6
7
Select Setting.
8
9
10
11
12
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select
Select Quick.
Make appropriate
adjustments.
Start using the
button. Then, press
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning.
• Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning
and Manual Tuning.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Network ID
Quick
►
►
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000
● Frequency(kHz)
►
Home Tuning
Quick
Select Close.
Select OK.
Select Start.
Run Auto tuning.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
35
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■When you select the Full,
Full
Cable
Search every available signal.
Cable
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
Skip Scramble Programme
Automatic Numbering
6
7
8
9
OK
Start
Close
Close
Select Full.
Select OK.
Select Start.
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select
Start using the
button. Then, press
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning.
• Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning
and Manual Tuning.
Run Auto tuning.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
36
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly.
The commonly used values are provided as "default".
However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider.
When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode, selecting Full will search through all frequencies to
find available channels.
In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default, perform the searching by
selecting the Full.
However, in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning time can be
taken too much.
•Frequency : Enter a user-defined frequency.
• Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as
modem sends symbols to a channel).
• Modulation : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier).
• Network ID : Unique identifier allocated for each user.
• Start Frequency : Enter a user-defined start frequency range.
• End Frequency : Enter a user-defined end frequency range.
37
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
CABLE DTV SETTING
(IN CABLE MODE ONLY)
The range that a user can select from the Service Operator menu differs depending on number of
Service Operator supported by each country, and if number of supported Service Operator for each
country is 1, corresponding function becomes non-activation.
SETUP
● Auto
Move
● Auto
Tuning
● Manual
● CI
Information
Cable DTV
DTV Setting
Setting
●●Cable
2
3
4
Edit
● Booster
: Off
OK
Tuning
● Programme
Edit
● Booster
1
Move
Tuning
● Manual
Tuning
● Programme
● CI
SETUP
OK
Information
Cable DTV
DTV Setting
Setting
●● Cable
►
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
After changing Service Operator, a warning window saying that channel map will be deleted when OK
button is pressed or Close is selected, and a Auto-tuning pop-up window appears when ‘YES’ is
selected.
Service Operator
: Off
◄ Comhem ►
Channel Auto Update
Off
Close
• If you select Cable, you can see Cable
Select SETUP.
Select Cable DTV Setting.
Select Service Operator or Channel
Auto Update.
DTV Setting menu.
•W
hen Channel Auto Update is On, the
channel information will be automatically
updated whenever the network information
changes.
•W
hen Channel Auto Update is Off, the
channel information will not be updated.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
38
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.
If you want to select the Antenna,
● Auto
Move
● Auto
Edit
● Booster
Move
◄
Tuning
● Manual Tuning
►
● Programme
►
● Manual Tuning
● CI
SETUP
OK
Tuning
● Programme
: Off
Edit
● Booster
Information
● CI
OK
►
DTV
UHF CH.
30
Frequency(kHz)
474000
: Off
Information
● Signal Strength
● Signal Quality
50%
50%
Add
Close
1
2
3
4
5
Select SETUP.
•U
se NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
Select Manual Tuning.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
Select DTV.
Select the desired channel number.
Select update or add if signal present.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
39
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
If you want to select the Cable,
● Auto
Move
● Auto
● Programme
Edit
● Programme
● Booster
: Off
Edit
● Booster
Information
● Cable
Move
◄
● CI
DTV Setting
OK
Cable
DTV
Frequency(kHz)
Tuning
● Manual Tuning
►
● Manual Tuning
● CI
SETUP
OK
Tuning
►
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
Symbol rate(kS/s)
Modulation
: Off
►
362000
6875
64QAM
Information
● Cable
DTV Setting
● Signal Strength
● Signal Quality
50%
50%
Add
Close
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.
Select Manual Tuning.
Select Cable DTV.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
•S
ymbol rate : Enter a user-defined
symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at
which a device such as modem sends
symbols to a channel).
•M
odulation : Enter a user-defined
modulation. (Modulation: Loading of
audio or video signals onto carrier).
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
40
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
(IN ANALOGUE MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.
● Auto
Move
● Auto
Edit
● Booster
Move
Tuning
● Programme
: Off
● CI
: Off
Information
►
TV
● Storage
Edit
● Booster
Information
OK
◄
● Manual Tuning
►
● Programme
►
● Manual Tuning
● CI
SETUP
OK
Tuning
● System
● Band
● Storage
BG
● System
V/UHF
● Channel
◄
3
0
or
● Channel
3
● Search
◄►
◄►
● Search
◄►
C 02
4
5
7
8
Select TV or Cable TV.
or
Select the desired
programme
number on.
0
● Fine
6
Select Manual Tuning.
V/UHF
◄►
● Name
9
C 02
Store
Close
2
BG
● Band
Store
Select SETUP.
►
3
● Fine
● Name
1
Cable TV
Close
Select V/UHF or Cable.
or
Select the desired
channel number.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
Commence searching.
Select Store.
Select a TV system.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
•Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System ‘On’.
•L : SECAM L/L’ (France)
BG : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa /
Australia)
I : PAL I/II (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa)
DK : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS)
•To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.
41
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
● Auto
Move
Tuning
● Auto
►
● Programme
Edit
● Booster
Move
Tuning
● Programme
: Off
Edit
● Booster
Information
● CI
OK
◄
● Manual Tuning
►
● Manual Tuning
● CI
SETUP
OK
: Off
Information
►
TV
◄
● Storage
3
● Storage
● System
BG
● System
● Band
V/UHF
● Channel
or
0
● Fine
● Search
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
● Name
BG
V/UHF
● Channel
● Fine
◄►
● Search
►
3
● Band
◄►
C 02
Cable TV
0
◄►
◄►
● Name
C 02
Store
Store
Close
Close
■■Assigning a station name
You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.
5
Select Manual Tuning.
Select TV or Cable TV.
6
Select Name.
7
Select the position and make
your choice of the second
character, and so on.
You can use an the alphabet
A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/
-, and blank.
Select Close.
Select Store.
■■Fine Tuning
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.
1
2
3
Select SETUP.
4
Select Manual Tuning.
5
Select TV or Cable TV.
6
Select Fine.
Fine tune for the best picture
and sound.
Select Store.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
42
PROGRAMME EDIT
When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P
during TV viewing.
button
If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER
buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu.
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
SETUP
Tuning
● Manual
Tuning
● Booster
● CI
►
●●Manual
Programme
Edit
Tuning
Programme
Edit
RADIO
DTV
OK
►
● Auto
Move
: Off
Information
Page 1/2
A
TV
800 YLE TV1
801 YLE TV2
802 YLE FST
803 YLE24
804 YLE Teema
805 TV4 Stockholm
806 Kanal Lokal
807 CNN
808 TV4
809 TV4 Plus
810 TV400
811 TV4 Film
812 TV4 Fakta
813 MediaCorp HD5
814 SNY_SSU
815 Demo
816 TVE 1
817 TVE 2
818 24H TVE
819 CLAN/50 TVE
820 LA7
▼
Pr. Change
P
FAV
Favourite Pr.
Q.MENU
Page Change
Favourite Pr. Group
Previous
Block/Unblock
Skip
or
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
Page 1/2
A
Cable Radio
Cable DTV
Cable TV
800 YLE TV1
801 YLE TV2
802 YLE FST
803 YLE24
804 YLE Teema
805 TV4 Stockholm
806 Kanal Lokal
807 CNN
808 TV4
809 TV4 Plus
810 TV400
811 TV4 Film
812 TV4 Fakta
813 MediaCorp HD5
814 SNY_SSU
815 Demo
816 TVE 1
817 TVE 2
818 24H TVE
819 CLAN/50 TVE
820 LA7
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked
when you start Auto Tuning.
▼
Pr. Change
P
1
2
3
4
Page Change
FAV
Favourite Pr.
Q.MENU
Favourite Pr. Group
Previous
Block/Unblock
Skip
Select SETUP.
Select Programme Edit.
Enter the Programme Edit.
Select a programme to be stored or
skipped.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
43
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
IN DTV/RADIO MODE
■■Skipping a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE Turn the programme number to blue.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
3
BLUE Release.
• When programmes are to be skipped, the
skipped programme shows in blue and
these programmes will not be selected by
the P
buttons during TV viewing.
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit or EPG.
■■Locking a programme number
1
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
YELLOW Turn the programme number to yellow.
3
YELLOW Release.
IN TV MODE
This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.
You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.
■■Deleting a programme
1
2
RED
Select a programme number to be deleted.
Turn the programme number to red.
•T
he selected programme is deleted, all the
following programmes are shifted up one
■■Moving a programme
1
2
GREEN
44
Select a programme number to be moved.
Turn the programme number to
green.
3
GREEN Release.
■■Skipping a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE Turn the programme number to blue.
3
■■Auto Sort
1
Start Auto Sort.
• After activating Auto Sort once, you can no
longer edit programmes.
■■Locking a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
YELLOW Turn the programme number to yellow.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
BLUE Release.
• When a programme number is skipped it
means that you will be unable to select it
using the P
button during normal TV
viewing.
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit or EPG.
3
YELLOW Release.
■■Selecting favourite programme
Favourite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your
choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.
1
2
3
Select your desired programme.
Add corresponding programme to Favourite
list of current Favourite group.
Release.
45
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■Selecting favourite programme group
1
2
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
46
3
Select your desired programme.
Display a pop-up window where
Favourite group can be changed.
Select a Favourite group.
BOOSTER
If reception is poor select Booster to "On".
When the signal is strong, select "Off".
● Auto
● CI
Information
1
Edit
● Booster
Information
: On
Off
Off
►
►
On
:: Off
OK
Tuning
● Programme
Edit
Booster
●●Booster
On
Teletext
Select SETUP.
2
Select Booster.
3
4
● Manual
Tuning
● Programme
Move
Tuning
►
● Manual
● CI
SETUP
OK
►
Move
Tuning
►
● Auto
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
Select On or Off.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
47
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION
This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI
Module, you cannot watch pay services.
When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu.
To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI
module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI
Module, you may not have any sound output.
This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card.
When using a CAM(Conditional Access Module), please make sure it meets fully the requirements of
either DVB-CI or CI plus.
SETUP
● Auto
Move
i
OK
Tuning
● Manual
Authorizations
Tuning
● Programme
Module information
Edit
● Booster
Viaccess Module
Consultations
: Off
● CI Information
►
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting circumstances.
Select the item
• This OSD is only for illustration and the menu
options and screen format will vary according to
the Digital pay services provider.
• It is possible for you to change CI (Common
Interface) menu screen and service by consulting your dealer.
1
Select SETUP.
2
Select CI Information.
3
4
Select the desired item: Module information, smart card
information, language, or software download etc.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
48
SOFTWARE UPDATE
You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server.
The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment. In this case, you
can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update your TV.
Picture Test
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Sound Test
Signal Test
Software Update
◄ On ►
● Current version
00.00.01
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
OPTION
NETWORK
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
2
Simple Manual
Close
Close
Exit
RED Select Customer Support.
•U
se the Check Update Version to update the
latest software on the Network server manually.
Select Software Update.
Select On or Off.
• If you select On, a user confirm message box will
be displayed to notify that new software is found.
3
4
GAME
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
MY MEDIA
Check Update Version
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Software Update
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
49
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■When setting “Software Update”
Occasionally, a transmission of
updated digital software information will result in the following
menu on the TV screen.
?
Software update is available.
Would you like to download now?
Yes
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
No
Simple Update : for current
update stream
? A new software update is available at
00/00/0 00:00.
Do you want to update the software when
available?
Download starts when "Yes" is
selected. At this time, progressing pop-up window does
not display.
Download progress status can
be checked from Software
Update menu.
Software Update
A window as display below
appears when download
completes.
TV is restarted when "Yes" is
selected.
New software version is ready. If you want
to install now, TV will be turned off and
restart. Continue?
◄ On ►
Software downloading progress.
Ver. 00.00.01 ► Ver.00.00.02
Yes
No
4%
Check Update Version
Close
Yes
No
Schedule Update : for scheduled
update stream
When the Software Update menu
is "Off", the message to change it
to "On" appears.
When new Software is available when
connected to Internet, the following
message will be displayed.
? New software version is ready. Do you
want to update it?
Starting Update
Remind me later
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu.
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.
<Simple Update, Schedule Update>
• The antenna must not be disconnected.
• The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service, and stops
when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service.
• When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service, the software download will
resume from where it stopped.
<Network Update>
• You do not disconnect the network while the software is being updated.
• You cannot open NetCast while the software is being updated.
50
PICTURE/SOUND TEST
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Picture Test
Sound Test
?
Do you have a problem in this test
screen?
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
OPTION
NETWORK
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
2
3
GAME
Yes
No
Network Test
Close
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
MY MEDIA
Simple Manual
Exit
RED Select Customer Support.
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Software Update
SETUP
Select Yes or No.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
51
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIGNAL TEST
This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and
Software Version.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.
This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.
(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple channels.))
Engineering Diagnostics
Software Update
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Picture Test
Sound Test
Signal
Signal Test
Test
Product/Service Info.
OPTION
NETWORK
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
MY MEDIA
GAME
Close
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Network Test
Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc.
Model/Type : 42LE7500-ZA
Serial No. : SKJY1107
Software Version : V00.00.01
Ch 30
Ch 34
Ch 36
Ch 38
Ch 54
Ch 60
Simple Manual
Exit
Prev.
1
2
3
4
Popup
MENU
RED Select Customer Support.
Select Signal Test.
Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and
Software Version.
Display the information of Channel.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
52
Exit
PRODUCT/SERVICE INFORMATION
This function is a customer support function that can see product/service information and customer service center
information.
Software Update
Picture Test
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
Sound Test
LOCK
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
NETWORK
OPTION
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
2
3
Close
GAME
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
MY MEDIA
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Network Test
Simple Manual
Exit
RED Select Customer Support.
Select Product/Service Info..
Display Model/Type, Software version, Serial Number,
Used time, Customer service center and Homepage.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to
return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move
to the previous menu screen.
NETWORK TEST
Check the network status.
Network Status
Software Update
TV
Picture Test
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Sound Test
Network connecting
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
OPTION
NETWORK
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
2
3
GAME
Close
Setting
Test
Close
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
MY MEDIA
Simple Manual
Exit
RED Select Customer Support.
Select Network Test.
Check the network status.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to
return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move
to the previous menu screen.
53
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
OPTION
NETWORK
BLUETOOTH
MY MEDIA
GAME
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
2
Simple Manual
Exit
• Use the RED button to go to the Index page.
GREEN Select Simple Manual.
•U
se the BLUE button to play the Simple
Manual automatically or manually.
Select the part of the manual you want to see.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
54
SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST
You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.
Programme List
1 BBC
►
Displayed when the
Locked Programme.
Exit
►
Mini Glossary
2 BBC
4 BBC
5 BBC
A
Pr.Edit
■■Displaying programme LIST
1
Display the Programme List.
•Y
ou may find some blue programmes.
These have been set up to be skipped by
auto programming or in the programme
edit mode.
•S
ome programmes with the channel number shown in the programme LIST indicate
there is no station name assigned.
BLUE
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
3 BBC
Turn the programme edit.
■■Selecting a programme in the programme list
1
2
Select a programme.
Switch to the chosen programme number.
The mode will be switched
between TV, DTV, and Radio
from the programme you are
currently watching.
55
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■Paging through a programme list
1
Turn the pages.
2
Return to normal TV viewing.
Exit
Favourite List
◄ ►Favourite Pr. Group
◄
Group
B
►
►
1 BBC
2 BBC
►
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■ Displaying the favourite programme list
3 BBC
Pr.Reg.
1
Pr.Edit
BLUE
Turn the programme edit.
YELLOW
Current channel is registered/
cancelled as preferred channel on
currently selected Group.
Display the Favourite Programme List.
Favourite group is changed.
56
INPUT LIST
HDMI and AV1 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external
device approves voltage.
By using TV/RAD button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched programme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode.
Input List
Move
Antenna
USB1
USB2
AV1
AV2
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
Select the input source.
Component
HDMI4
Input Label
1
OK
Exit
•A
ntenna or Cable : Select it when watching the DTV/RADIO/TV.
• USB : Select it when using USB depends
on connector.
• AV : Select it when watching the VCR or
external equipment.
•C
omponent : Select it when using the
DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on
connector.
•R
GB :Select it when using PC depends on
connector.
•H
DMI : Select it when using DVD, PC or
Digital set-top box depend on connector.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
57
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INPUT LABEL
Selects a label for each input source.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Input Label
Input List
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Antenna
RGB
Move
USB1
HDMI1
USB2
HDMI2
AV1
AV2
HDMI3
OK
Component
HDMI4
Input Label
Exit
AV1
◄
►
AV2
◄
►
Component
◄
►
RGB
◄
►
◄
►
HDMI1
▼
Close
1
2
3
BLUE Select Input Label.
Select the source.
Select the label.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
58
DATA SERVICE
(This menu is enabled only in Ireland. )
This function allow users to choose between MHEG(Digital Teletext) and Teletext if both exist at the same
time.
If only one of them exists, either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you selected.
Move
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: Ireland
● Disability Assistance
Indicator
● Set
1
Setting
Indicator
● Data Service
Reset
ID
● Mode
: Ireland
● Factory
:1
● Set
: Home Use
● Mode
Reset
ID
Setting
MHEG
MHEG
MHEG
: :MHEG
Teletext
►
● Factory
● Power
MHEG
: :MHEG
►
● Data Service
OK
● Disability Assistance
►
● Power
:1
: Home Use
Select OPTION.
2
Select Data Service.
3
4
Move
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
Select MHEG or Teletext.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
59
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MHP SERVICE
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE58**, 32/37/42/47/55LE78**, 42/47/55LE88**,
32/37/42/47/55LD68**, 32/42/47LD78**, 32/37/42LD88**, 50/60PK78**,
50/60PK98**)
(This menu is enabled only in Italy. )
This function is Auto Start function of MHP, Italian data broadcast.
Use in channel with MHP signal.
Data broadcast function may not be smooth due to situation from the broadcasting station.
Move
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: Italy
● Disability Assistance
Indicator
● Factory
● Set
2
3
● Power
Off
: :MHEG
Setting
Indicator
MHP Service
Auto start
● Data
Reset
ID
● Mode
: Italy
● Factory
:1
● Set
: Home Use
● Mode
Reset
ID
Setting
On
Off MHEG
: :MHEG
Off
►
MHP Service
Auto start
● Data
OK
● Disability Assistance
►
● Power
1
Move
● Language(Language)
►
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
:1
: Home Use
Select OPTION.
Select MHP Auto start.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
60
■■When MHP Auto Start is set to On
1
RED
Display the MHP.
1
2
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■■When MHP Auto Start is set to Off
Display the MHP Application List.
Select your desired MHP broadcast.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
61
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK
This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.
Please check the SIMPLINK logo.
This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.
This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable
without additional cables and settings.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
If you do not want SIMPLINK menu,select “Off”.
In wireless external output, SIMPLINK function is not supported.
OK
◄
On
Exit
►
Watch TV
DISC
VCR
VCR Recorder
HDD
◄ Speaker
TV Speaker
1
2
3
►
Display the SIMPLINK.
Select On or Off.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
62
Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo.
Connect the HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI), HDMI/DVI IN
2, HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 (Except for
32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***) terminal on the back of the TV and the HDMI output
terminal of the Home Theater using HDMI
cables.
2
Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on
the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input
terminal of the Home Theater using optical
cables.
3
Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by
pushing the SIMPLINK button.
►► When you select or operate a media device with
home theater function, the speaker automatically
switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker).
1
2
Home Theater
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
NOTE
►►Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK
device with the HDMI cable.
►►When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the operation of a device controlled by SIMPLINK.
63
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK Functions
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
64
Disc playback
Control connected AV devices by pressing the
, OK, ►, ▀, l l, ◄◄ and ►► buttons.
Direct Play
After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional settings.
Select AV device
Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.
Power off all devices
When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
Switch audio-out
Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
Sync Power on
When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically
to turn on mode.
* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK,
does not provide this function.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed HDMI Cable with *CEC function should be used.
(*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control).
SIMPLINK Menu
Press the
1
2
4
5
TV viewing : Switch to the previous TV programme regardless of the current mode.
DISC playback : Select and play connected
discs.
When multiple discs are available, the device
type of discs are conveniently displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
VCR playback : Play and control the connected VCR.
DD Recordings playback : Play and conH
trol recordings stored in HDD.
OK
◄
On
Exit
►
1
Watch TV
Selected Device
2
DISC
3
VCR
When a device is connected (displayed in
bright colour)
4
VCR Recorder
HDD
5
◄ Speaker
TV Speaker
►
When device is not connected (displayed in
gray)
udio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to
A
TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for
Audio Out.
• Home theater: Only one supported at a time
• DVD, Recorder: Up to three(Only 32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***), four(Only
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***, 50/60PK5**, 50/60PK7***,
50/60PK9***) supported at a time.
• VCR: Only one supported at a time
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
3
button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.
65
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
AV MODE
You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.
Off
Cinema
Sport
Game
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
Disables the AV MODE.
Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.
Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.
Optimizes video and audio for playing games.
Off
Cinema
Game
Sport
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.
2
• If you select Cinema in AV mode, Cinema will be selected both for
Picture Mode and Sound Mode in PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu
respectively.
• If you select “Off” in AV mode, the picture and image which you initially
set will be selected.
66
INITIALIZING(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)
This function initializes all settings.
But the settings of
Day and
Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized.
It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.
When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.
When the Lock System menu is "On", the message to enter the password appears.
Move
● Country
● Country
: UK
● Disability Assistance
● Disability Assistance
● Power
● Power
Indicator
ID
● Mode
● IR
3
4
Setting
Blaster
OK
: UK
:1
Indicator
All user settings and channel settings will
be reset. Still Continue?
● Set ID
:1
: Home Use
● Mode
: Off
● IR
►
►
● Set
2
Move
● Language(Language)
● Factory Reset
1
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
Select OPTION.
● Factory Reset
Setting
Blaster
: Home Use
Yes
No
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
• In Lock System "On", if you forget your
password, press '0', '3', '2', '5' on the
remote control handset.
Select Factory Reset.
Select Yes.
Start Factory Reset.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
67
NETCAST
LEGAL NOTICE
Legal Notice
01/03 page
NETWORK
Move
OK
• Network Status
: Internet is connected
•Legal Notice
Notice
•Legal
►
•Network Setting : Wired
NETCAST
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE All content and services
accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided
solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without
limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service
provider, you may not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create
derivative works, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed
through this device.YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND
ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
▼
Close
1
2
3
Select NETWORK.
Select Legal Notice.
Check Legal notice.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
68
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICES
SERVICE
NETCAST
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the
foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may
not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in any
manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR,
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE
AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES,
INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR ANY CONTENT
OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access
may be disabled at any time, without notice, and LG makes no representation or warranty that any
content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted
by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which LG has no control. LG
may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption,
disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any
question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
69
NETCAST
NETCAST MENU
These services are provided by separate Content Provider.
Please visit the content providers web site for specific information on their services. (But, some content
manual maybe not provide depending on Content Provider).
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
NETCAST
Accu
YouTube
Weather
1
2
Picasa
Select NETCAST menu option.
Enjoy the AccuWeather, Picasa or YouTube.
NOTE
►The videos list searched from the TV may different with the list searched from a web browser on PC.
►The settings of this TV do not affect the YouTube’s playback quality.
►The playback videos may be paused, stopped or buffering occurring often depending on your
broadband speed.
We recommend a minimum connection speed of 1.5 Mbps. For the best playback condition, a connection speed of 4.0 Mbps is required. Sometimes your broadband speed varies based on your
ISP’s network conditions. Contact your ISP if you have problems maintaining a fast connection that
is reliable, or if you want to increase your connection speed. Many ISPs offer a variety of broadband
speed options.
►►To view the owner’s manual that provided by the Content Provider, visit our website at http://www.lg.com.
►►To see the activation method of Orange or maxdome, click the Orange, maxdome in the CD manual (Only
Frence or German).
►►For service that requires log in, join the applicable service on the website using the PC and log in through
the TV to enjoy various additional functionalities.
►►When you set the city you want with Setup by pressing the red button, the background of NetCast will be
set to the weather of the selected city.
►►If there is no user action 2 minutes following freezing image or video on screen, the screensaver will activate itself preventing fixed image remaining on screen. (Plasma TV only)
• Press the RED button to select Weather of area.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
70
YOUTUBE
YouTube is a video sharing website where users can upload, view, and share video clips.
YouTube Screen Components
1
YouTube menu
Videos list
1
2
RED
NETCAST
2
Set the option menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
NOTE
►►When you press the Q.menu button while the Youtube video is playing in full mode, you can set the video
options.
71
NETCAST
YouTube Service menu
NETCAST
● Home: You can watch the popular video in real time.
● Featured: The featured videos list will be displayed.
● Popular: The best rated videos list from YouTube server will be displayed.
● Most Viewed: The most viewed videos list will be displayed.
● Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
● History: The videos list that you previously played will be displayed. Maximum of 20 videos can be stored.
● Favorites: In sign-in status, this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the YouTube server with your account (Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list, even if the videos are arranged in the server).
● Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
Using the remote control
■
Stops the video and displays related videos list.
II
Pause the video while it is playing.
►
Play the selected video.
Skip the playback forward or backward.
RED
Set the option menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
72
ACCUWEATHER
Accuweather is the programme to view the weather of the city the user wants.
AccuWeather Screen Components
1
2
1
2
NETCAST
3
AccuWeather menu
Weather list by city
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
3
RED
Change between Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Move the focus to the menu you want.
Select the focused menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
AccuWeather Service menu
● Home: The weather of selected city is displayed.
● Favorite City: Frequently checked cities can be registered to check the weather.
NOTE
►By
► default, New York, London and Paris are registered and the user can add/delete cities from
Favorite City.
►LG
► is not responsible for the accuracy of the weather forecast.
►Applicable
►
weather information can differ from the actual weather depending on the information
provided by Accuweather.
73
NETCAST
PICASA
Picasa is an application from Google that appreciates digital image files.
Picasa Screen Components
NETCAST
1
2
3
Picasa menu
Photos list
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
1
2
3
Select the desired photo.
The selected photo file is displayed.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
74
Picasa Service menu
● Home: The featured photos list will be displayed.
● Friends: You can register users with the pictures you want as friends. You can add up to 10 friends.
● Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
● My Photos: You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web. This function can only be used when
you sign in.
● Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
NETCAST
75
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LD6***, 32/42/47LD7***,
50/60PK5**)
BLUETOOTH?
Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types
of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances
through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange.
With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset
or receive images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
• Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
• Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2
• Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft)
• Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz)
• Bluetooth Module: RBFS-B921A(Plasma TV), RBFS-B721A(LCD/LED LCD TV) (LG Electronics)
• Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile)
A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
HSP(Headset Profile)
OPP(Object Push Profile)
BIP(Basic Imaging Profile)
FTP(File Transfer Profile)
Precautions when using the Bluetooth
►►Use within 7 m (-45° to 45°) range.
►►If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication
error.
►►Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices.
►►Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communication error by using the same frequency bandwidth.
►►The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation.
►►The probability of search increases with less number of devices.
►►Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices.
►►Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot
provide services related to human life.
►►You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time.
►►You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the
Bluetooth headset.
►►For details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device.
►►Operation is subject to the following two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
►►Bluetooth can be used about 30 seconds after the power is turned on.
►►Depending on the transmission processing method and performance of the headset used, the audio can be
instantly disconnected.
QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B015199
76
SETTING THE BLUETOOTH
If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images
from an external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device),
you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables.
You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting “Bluetooth on”.
If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select “Bluetooth off”.
If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select “Bluetooth off” after disconnecting
the device.
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Bluetooth on
Move
OK
Bluetooth is off.
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
OPTION
NETWORK
Press OK(
BLUETOOTH
2
GAME
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
1
MY MEDIA
Simple Manual
Exit
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Exit
Bluetooth
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Bluetooth on.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
77
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH HEADSET
When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset
through wireless communication.
You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.
A maximum of 12 devices can be paired.
When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the “Stop” (OK button)
do not work.
Connecting a new Bluetooth headset
You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the Disconnected condition.
When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding.
After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For
details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth off
Searching Bluetooth headset
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
OK
1/1
42LH70YD-SE
No Bluetooth device.
New
Search headset
My Info
1
2
3
4
5
Stop searching
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Search headset.
Select the desired Bluetooth
headset.
Select the desired Bluetooth headset
PIN number. Refer to the user manual
of the applicable device for the PIN
number.
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
78
Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered
Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed
at the top.
When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly
without any PIN validation.
Bluetooth
Move
Exit
Bluetooth
Exit
Move
OK
OK
Bluetooth off
1/1
Bluetooth off
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Disconnect
No device
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Search headset
1
2
3
My Info
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
My Info
Remove device
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select the desired Bluetooth headset.
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
• After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the Disconnected condition automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on.
• After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the
sound will only be generated from the headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
79
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
OK
Bluetooth off
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Disconnect
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
2
3
4
Do you want to disconnect headset?
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Disconnect
My Info
1
OK
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Disconnect
Cancel
My Info
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Disconnect.
Select Disconnect.
Disconnect the Bluetooth headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
80
When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset
When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request
from the headset, this message is displayed.
Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of
the applicable Bluetooth headset.)
Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they
are turned off/on even though they are not included in the
Registered Device list.
1
Do you want to use your headset?
Yes
No
Select Yes or No.
►►LG recommends the following headset models.
-Plantronics VOYAGER-855 / SONY HBHDS970, HBH-DS980 / Motorola S605 /
Logitech Freepulse-wireless
There might be an audio delay, depending on
the buffer memory size of the headset.
►The
►
stereo/mono headset officially certified
to be Bluetooth compatible can be searched
and connected.
►The
►
stereo/mono headset that supports the
A2DP or HSP function among the Bluetooth
devices can be connected.
►If
► the surrounding environment of the TV is
as follows, the device may not be searched
or connected properly.
-If there is strong electromagnetic wave.
-If there are many Bluetooth devices.
-If the headset is turned off, not in place or
has an error.
-Because products such as microwave oven,
wireless LAN, plasma light, gas range etc.,
use the same frequency range, it can cause
communication error.
►Only
►
one Bluetooth headset can be connected at once.
►Connection
►
that is lost due to the TV being
turned off etc. will not be automatically recovered. Try connecting the applicable device
again.
►Some
►
operations can be slower while operating the headset.
►Even
►
if you choose simplink Home Theater
after using the headset during Simplink operation, the unit will not automatically switch to
Home Theater speakers.
►When
►
the headset connection continuously
fails, pair the device one more time.
►The
►
audio quality of mono headsets will not be
as good as that for stereo headsets.
►Mono
►
headsets may suffer from noise as the
distance from the TV increases, because they
use a different transmission method compared
with stereo headsets.
►►When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the
Volume +/- and Mute keys do not work, and
the Audio menu returns to the default value
and is disabled.
►With
►
Bluetooth set to On, if any registered
devices are turned on, the TV will switch to
Bluetooth mode automatically even though you
are watching in another input mode. In this
case, set Bluetooth to Off.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
NOTE
81
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
REMOVE THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no
longer be able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is
connected to the TV) and then you can register another device.
"Remove device" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV.
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
Bluetooth off
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
No device
Search headset
Search headset
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Remove device
1
3
4
Move
OK
1/1
Bluetooth off
2
Exit
Bluetooth
OK
Do you want to delete the selected Bluetooth
device?
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Delete
Cancel
My Info
My Info
Select BLUETOOTH.
RED Select Remove device.
Select Delete.
Remove the Bluetooth device.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
82
MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION
This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user.
"Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device.
You can edit the Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
You can check the TV address.
To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device,
the PIN needs to be entered.
For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the
applicable device.
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
Bluetooth
OK
1/1
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth off
Exit
Move
My Info
1/1
Setup TV PIN.
0000
Setup TV name.
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
DR-BT140Q
No device
Search headset
Search headset
Remove device
1
TV address
GLOBAL-PLAT2
PLT 510
sgh-e760
Close
Select BLUETOOTH.
No device
00:05:c9:51:06:f3
Remove device
My Info
OK
My Info
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 16 digits.
The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit.
• Press the DELETE button to delete digits
one by one.
2
BLUE Select My Info.
3
Select Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
4
5
You can use an the alphabet A to Z,
the number 0 to 9, +/ -, and blank.
Save.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
83
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH
DEVICE
For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the
user manual of the applicable device.
Receiving picture(s)
Cancel
F
◄
Rotate
1/2
G
Hide
►
Exit
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
• When you select Hide with the ꕌꕍ< > button, the OSD will disappear.
And when you press the OK button again, it will appear again.
Select the desired photos.
(Rotate) : Rotate photos.
■■ Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon OK button on
(Rotate).
• The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device.
• When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the BACK button to stop
receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result.
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set.
84
LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL
BLUETOOTH DEVICE
For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user
manual of the applicable device.
You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device).
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system.
Listening to bluetooth music...
Press any key to finish.
NOTE
►►You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset.
►►You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s).
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
• Press the
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
• If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
• Press the BACK button to return to normal TV viewing.
85
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
WHEN CONNECTING A USB DEVICE
When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.
“POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activated or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected.
When the Pop Up menu appears, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List in the MY MEDIA menu.
In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.
After choosing the desired type of media, choose a device to open files from. The options are: USB
device or DLNA.
* CIFS : This feature is not available for all models.
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1
or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
• Only photo(JPEG), music (MP3) and movie(DAT,
MPG, MPEG, VOB, AVI, DIVX, MP4, MKV, TS,
TRP, TP, ASF, WMV) are supported.
or
When removing the USB device
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Select the USB Device menu before removing
the USB device.
2
1
Select Movie List, Photo List or
Music List.
2
MY MEDIA
Movie List
Press OK(
Photo List
4BLUE
Select Eject.
Music List
NOTE
) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
3
Select USB Device.
Exit
Select the desired device.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
►►In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick,
use the USB connector(sold separately) to fix
the USB memory stick to the USB connector
holder of the TV. (Plasma TV only)
USB connector holder
Search other network device.
Please select the device.
USB
Input Port
USB Label
USB Label
USB Connector (sold separately)
- Fix the one end of the USB connector to
the USB memory stick and the other end
to the USB connector holder.
DLNA
Device Selection
Search
86
Previous
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous
menu screen.
Precautions when using the USB device
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
►►Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
►►If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.
►►A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.
►►A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
►►The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
►►Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working.
When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be
damaged.
►►Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The
device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files or movie files.
►►Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system
provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility
programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.
►►Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If
not, the device may not be recognized.
►►Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker.
►►Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.
►►File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100
English characters.
►►Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We
will not be responsible for any data loss.
►►If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to
connect the external power source. - Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guarantee an USB cable for an external power source.
►►If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use
up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
►►If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.
►►If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.
►►How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.
►►If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is
turned on.
►►The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
►►Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.
►►If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on
again to make it work properly.
►►USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
►►Maximum of 1,000 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.
►►The file arrangement of the USB storage device is similar to that of Windows XP and supports up to
100 alphabetical characters.
►►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
►►Folders can be recognized up to 200.
87
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
CIFS (COMMON INTERNET FILE SYSTEM)
* CIFS : This feature is not available for all models.
Share folder (CIFS: Common Internet File System) Setup
The method of setting the shared folder may be different by the OS environment.
Case 1 (Windows XP)
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
88
1
Select the folder you wish to share and
then click Sharing.
2
Check Share this folder and click Apply.
Case 2 (Window Vista)
1
Choose the folder that you want to share.
Then, right-click and click Share.
2
Choose the folder that you want to share.
Right-click and click Properties.
Click Advanced Sharing on Sharing tab.
Check Share this folder and click Permission.
Add Everyone and check Full Control - Allow.
3
Check File sharing-On, Public folder sharingOn, and Password protected sharing-Off.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Add the Everyone and click Share.
89
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Viewing Files on the Network
1
Set a share folder (CIFS: Common Internet File System) on the PC (Refer to P.88 to 89).
2
Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN port on the TV.
i.e) LED LCD TV / LCD TV
1
Broadband Modem
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Broadband Modem
Broadband Service
Broadband Service
3
4
90
Router
Select MY MEDIA.
Repeat step 2 to 5 on P.86.
►Connect the PC and TV using a sharing device so that you can see the PC’s shared files on the
TV.
►How to set a share folder may differ depending on the Windows version.
►The speed may be slow or it may cause an error if you try to access a folder from two TVs at the
same time.
►Because files could be deleted from a shared PC, set the user access level to Read Only.
►Do not share any important personal documents as it may be accessed by a different PC.
►If you rename or disable a shared folder on the PC after mounting, you cannot mount it again.
►If the status of the network or a share folder on the PC is changed, search is run again when entering the highest folder in the menu.
►Maximum of 32 computers can be shared.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
91
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
DLNA
About DLNA
This TV is a DLNA Certified digital media product that can display and play movie, photo and music
content from your DLNA Certified network device and DLNA server. The Digital Living Network Alliance
(DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile
device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a
wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA
server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV, some setting changes of
software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software
or device for more information.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
92
NOTE
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM is a customized software edition only for
sharing files and folders to this TV.
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions:
Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
►This manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as
examples. Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows. If you are already
using DLNA server software on your PC, Nero MediaHome is not required. Nero MediaHome is not
required for Windows 7 since it has a built-in DLNA server.
1
Start up your computer, and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process.
2
Close all Microsoft Windows programmes and exit any anti-virus software that may be running.
3
Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4
Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The installation is prepared and the installation wizard
appears.
5
Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen.
Click Next to go to the next step.
6
If you accept all conditions, click I accept the License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.
7
Click Typical and click Next. The installation process is started.
8
If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click the Next
button.
9
Click the Exit button to complete the installation.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
■■ Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required),
Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server® 2003
■■ Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application runs in 32-bit mode)
■■ Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome standalone
■■ 1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
■■ Memory: 256 MB RAM
■■ Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, and
16-bit color settings
■■ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
■■ DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or higher
■■ Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet, WLAN (IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) (IEEE 802.11 n: Except for
Russia)
93
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add folders you wish to share.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
94
1
Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop.
2
Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV.
3
Click Shares icon on the left.
4
Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
5
Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.
6
Select the folder containing the files you want to share. The selected folder is added to the list of
shared folders.
7
Click Start Server icon to start the server.
NOTE
►If the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders
tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button.
►Visit www.nero.com for more information and software tools.
Playing back shared contents
You can display and play movie, photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1 Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network.
2
Select MY MEDIA.
3
Select Movie List, Photo List or Music List.
Select the DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may need to get the permission from
the server.
If you want to re-scan available media server, press blue colour button.
4
►To play the file on the media server, the TV and the media server must be connected to the same
access point.
►Because the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested
on the bundle DLNA server (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials) environment, file requirements and
playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers.
►The file requirements on this page are not always compatible. There may have some restrictions
by file features and media server’s ability.
►►Even the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail.
►Movie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie.
►If there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu, the TV will skip the file and play next
file.
►The file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in
MY MEDIA menu.
►This TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
►The subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder.
►If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has to
remove and re-add the folder to the list of shares.
►The playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home network condition.
►The files from removable media such as USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server may not
share properly.
►When
►
playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support the DivX file play which is
protected by DRM.
►Up
► to 200 folders in one folder and 1000 including folders and files can be recognized.
►If
► there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
NOTE
95
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
MOVIE LIST
You can play movie files on a USB or PC storage device.
The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.
Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.
Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.
It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
96
Movie(*.mpg/*.mpeg/*.dat/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mov/*.mkv/*.dvix/*.avi/*.asf/*.wmv/*.avi(motion-jpeg)/*.mp4(motionjpeg)/*.mkv(motion-jpeg))supporting file
Video format : DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid1.10 beta-1/beta-2,
Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC, VC1, JPEG, Sorenson H.263
Audio format : Dolby Digital, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM, HE-AAC, ADPCM, WMA
Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps(MP3)
External Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivX)
Internal Subtitle format : only, XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)
• Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.
• Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.
• HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
• Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available.
• Changing font and colour in subtitles is not supported.
• Subtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported.
• Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly.
• The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is
changed.
• A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.
• Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted.
• HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame.
• Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly depending on
the frame.
• Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
• Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps.
• We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
• DTS Audio codec is not supported.
• A movie file more than 30 GB in file size is not supported for playback.
• A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
• A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
• Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.
• The movie file encoded by the GMC (Global Motion Compensation) and Qpel (Quarterpel Motion Estimation) is not
supported.
• When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by Energy Saving and AV Mode
key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not operate.
• Trick Mode does not support other functions than ►► if video files do not have index information.
• When playing video file using network, the Trick mode is limited to 2-times speed.
• Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable.
Supported DivX file
File Extensions
.asf
.wmv
A/V
Video
Audio
Codec
Profile/Level Support
VC-1 Advanced Profile
Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
VC-1 Simple and Main Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF, QVGA)
standard
are supported.
Profiles
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)
WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
DivX3.11
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6
.divx
.avi
Video
Video
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Advanced Simple Profile (e.g.
720p/1080i)
Audio
AAC
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Video
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Audio
AAC
Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC
MPEG-2
Video
VC-1
Audio
Video
.vob
Audio
.mpg
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
MPEG-4 Part 2
.mkv
.ts
.trp
.tp
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
Video
Audio
Global motion compensation or quarterpel motion estimation does not
supported. Streams
using this syntax are
not supported.
Global motion
compensation or
quarterpel motion
estimation does
not supported.
Streams using this
syntax are not supported.
Most of the MKV
content available is
encoded by the open
source x264 codec.
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
.mp4
.m4v
XViD
H.264 / AVC
Audio
Explanation
Main Profile@High Level(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Simple Profile@Medium Level
Only streams com(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
pliant to SMPTE
(e.g. 1080p30)
421M VC-1 standAdvanced Profile@Level3
ard are supported.
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
AAC
MPEG-1
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
MPEG-1
MPEG-1Layer I, II
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Only streams compliant
configured properly for
TS, PS or ES
97
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Screen Components
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
1
Select MY MEDIA.
2
Select Movie List.
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
98
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on 1
Page 1/1
Movie List
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
005
006
Page 1/1
003
5
004
4
Move
Change Device
To Photo List
Change Numbers
3
Play
P
Mark Mode
Page Change
MARK
Exit
Mark
Movie Selection
■■When playing movie files
Page 1/1
Movie List
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
005
006
Page 1/1
003
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
Move
Change Device
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Change Numbers
Play
P
Page Change
movie page.
Mark
Exit
Mark Mode
• Use the P
MARK
button to navigation in the
Select the desired movie title.
3
Movie files are played.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Photo List->Music List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
►
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
To Photo List
004
Return to normal TV viewing.
Press the PLAY(►) button to return to normal playback.
99
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When selected movie files are played
Page 1/1
Movie List
Mark Mode
Drive1
USB1 External
Page 1/1
001
002
003
005
006
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
004
Move
Play Marked
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Page Change
Exit Mark Mode
MARK
Mark
Exit
• When one or more movie files are
marked, the marked movies will
be played in sequence.
Select the desired movie title.
Convert to Mark Mode.
BLUE
or
4
5
Unmark All
P
Select the target folder or drive.
2
3
Mark All
Mark
Mark desired Movie file.
RED
Marked movie file is played.
NOTE
►►In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed.
100
Using the remote control
RED
Play the selected movie file.
Once a movie file finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.
GREEN
Mark all movie files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked movie files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
Return to normal TV viewing.
►If
► you select “Yes” from OSD when playing the same file after the movie file has been stopped, it
will restart where it stopped previously.
►If
► continuous series files exist within the folder, the next file will automatically be played.
But, this excludes cases when the Repeat function of Movie List Option is turned “On” (Refer to
p. 104) or when set as Marked Play.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
NOTE
101
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the Movie List function, play
Choose options.
Set Video Play.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
■
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
2
Close
◄►
►
II
►
or
01:02:30 / 02:30:25
◄◄ ►►
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Video Play., Set Video. or Set Audio..
NOTE
►►Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
►►Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
►►When replaying the video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped previously.
102
Using the remote control
■
►
II
◄◄ / ►►
Stop the playing movie file.
Press the PLAY(►) button to return to normal playback.
During playback, press the Pause(II) button.
■■ Still screen is displayed.
■■ If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the
TV returns to the playback state.
■■ Press the Pause(II) button and then use the FF(►►) button for slow motion.
When playing,
repeatedly, press the REW(◄◄) button to speed up ◄◄(x2) -> ◄◄◄(x4) ->
◄◄◄◄(x8) ->◄◄◄◄◄(x16) ->◄◄◄◄◄◄(x32) .
repeatedly, press the FF(►►) button to speed up ►►(x2)-> ►►►(x4) ->
►►►►(x8) ->►►►►►(x16) -> ►►►►►►(x32).
■■ Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.
MENU
BACK
EXIT
<>
Q.MENU
Show the Option menu.
Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to display.
Return to normal TV viewing.
■■ When using the < or > button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
be viewed on the screen.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 138)
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
or
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 66)
103
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When you select the Set Video Play,
Set Video Play.
Picture Size
◄
Full
►
Audio Language
◄
1
►
Subtitle Language
◄
On
►
● Language
◄
English
►
● Code page
◄
Default
►
● Sync
◄
0
►
● Position
◄
0
►
● Size
◄
Normal
►
Repeat
◄
On
►
Previous
1
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
2
Select Picture Size, Audio Language, Subtitle Langugae or Repeat.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Subtitle Language
Support Language
Latin1
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish,
Finnish, Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian,
Norwegian, Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish,
Catalan,Valencian
Latin2
Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech,
Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian
Latin4
Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian
Cyrillic
Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh
Greek
Greek
Turkish
Turkish
►Picture
►
Size : Selects your desired picture
format during movie play.
►Audio
►
Language : Changes the Language
Group of the audio during movie play. Files
with a single audio track cannot be selected.
►Subtitle
►
Langugae : Turn on/off the external subtitle.
►Language
►
: Activated for SMI subtitle and
can select the language within the subtitle.
►Code
►
page : Can select the font for subtitle. When set to default, same font as general menu will be used.
►Sync
►
: Adjusts the time synchronisation of
the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by
steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.
►►Position : Changes the position of the subtitle
either up or down during movie play.
►Size
►
: Selects your desired Subtitle size
during movie play.
►Repeat
►
: Turn on/off repeat function of
movie playback. When turned on, the file
within the folder will be played back
repeatedly. Even when the repeated playback is turned off, it can run the playback if
the file name is similar to the previous file.
NOTE
104
►►Only 500 alphabets and 500 numbers are supported for each line of the subtitle.
►►Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file.
■■When you select the Set Video,
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PLASMA TV Only
Set Video.
Set Video.
Picture Mode
◄
● Backlight
70
◄
● Contrast
100
◄
● Brightness
50
◄
● Colour
60
Picture Mode
►
● Contrast
100
◄
● Brightness
50
◄
►
►
● Sharpness
50
◄
►
►
● Colour
60
◄
►
Standard
◄
►
◄
Medium
►
● Tint
0
R
G
● Edge Enhancer
◄
High
►
● Colour Temp.
0
W
C
● Noise Reduction
◄
Medium
►
● Noise Reduction
TruMotion
◄
Low
►
Previous
Picture Reset
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 139 to 148)
◄
Low
►
Previous
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
2
◄
►
● Dynamic Contrast
Picture Reset
1
Standard
105
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
Standard
►
Auto Volume
◄
Off
►
Clear Voice II
◄
Off
►
Balance
0
◄
L
R ►
Previous
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
106
1
2
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
PHOTO LIST
You can view photo files on USB or PC storage device.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode.
PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file
Baseline : 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640
Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440
• You can play JPEG files only.
• Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Screen Components
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
1
Select MY MEDIA.
2
Select Photo List.
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 1
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on 1
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
010
011
Page 1/1
003
004
005
006
012
013
014
015
Move
Change Device
To Music List
Change Numbers
007
008
5
009
4
View
P
Mark Mode
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
3
107
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Photo Selection
■■When playing photo files
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
010
011
Page 1/1
003
004
005
006
012
013
014
015
Move
Change Device
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Change Numbers
Select the target folder or drive.
2
View
P
Page Change
Mark Mode
• Use the P
photo page.
009
MARK
Mark
Exit
button to navigation in the
Select the desired photos.
3
Photo files are displayed.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Music List->Movie List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
108
To Music List
008
007
Return to normal TV viewing.
■■When selected photo files are displayed
Page 1/1
Photo List
Mark Mode
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
010
011
Page 1/1
003
004
005
006
012
013
014
015
Move
View Marked
Select the target folder or drive.
2
3
Select the desired photos.
BLUE
4
5
Unmark All
or
Convert to Mark Mode.
Mark desired photo file.
RED
Mark
P
Page Change
Exit Mark Mode
009
MARK
Mark
Exit
• When one or more photos are marked, you
can view each marked photo or a slide show
of the marked photos. If no photos are
marked, you can view every individual photo
in the folder or a slide show of all photos in
the folder.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Mark All
008
007
Marked photo file is displayed.
109
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
RED
GREEN
Mark all photo files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked photo files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
110
Display the selected photo file.
Return to normal TV viewing.
How to view photo
Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.
Page 1/1
Photo List
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
010
011
Page 1/1
003
004
005
006
012
013
014
015
Move
To Music List
Change Device
008
007
View
P
Page Change
Mark Mode
Change Numbers
009
MARK
Mark
Exit
◄
►
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
Press the EXIT button to move to the previous
menu screen.
◄
Slideshow
1
2
3
►
BGM
■
2/13
►
Q.MENU
Option
Select the target folder or drive.
Hide
Exit
• Use the P
photo page.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
button to navigation in the
Select the desired photos.
The selected photo is displayed in full
size.
• Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
• Press the BACK button to make Help OSD disappear.
111
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
4
◄
Slideshow
►
BGM
■
2/13
• Use
►
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
►►Slideshow : When no picture is selected, all photos in the current folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are
selected, those photos are displayed in a slide show.
■ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option.
►►BGM (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos
in full size.
■ Set the Music Folder for BGM in Options before using
this function.
■ You can adjust Option by Q.MENU or MENU button on
the remote control.
►► � (Rotate) : Rotate photos.
■ Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise.
■ It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger
than supported height.
►►
/
: You can view the photo in Full or Original mode.
►►
: Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to
change the brightness of your screen. (Refer to p. 138)
►►Option : Set values for Slide Speed and Music Folder for
BGM.
■ Use
button and OK button to set values. Press
OK to save the settings.
■ You cannot change Music Folder while BGM is playing.
■ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device
that currently displays the photo.
►►Hide : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press
OK button to display.
Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
112
BGM, � (Rotate),
/ ,
,
Option, Hide or
Exit.
►
◄
Select the
Slideshow,
button to select the previous
or next photo.
• Use
button to select and control
the menu on the full-sized screen.
Using the Photo List function
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
Choose options.
◄
►
Set Photo View.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
◄
Slideshow
2
or
BGM
■
2/13
►
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Photo View., Set Video. or Set Audio..
NOTE
►►Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
►►Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
►
113
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When you select the Set Photo View,
Set Photo View.
Slide Speed
◄
BGM
Fast
►
Drive1
● Repeat
◄
On
►
● Random
◄
Off
►
Previous
1
2
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
114
Select Slide Speed or BGM.
Make appropriate adjustments.
■■When you select the Set Video,
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PLASMA TV Only
Set Video.
Set Video.
Picture Mode
● Backlight
◄
70
◄
● Contrast
100
◄
● Brightness
50
◄
● Colour
60
Standard
◄
►
Picture Mode
►
● Contrast
100
◄
● Brightness
50
◄
►
►
● Sharpness
50
◄
►
►
● Colour
60
◄
►
Photo
◄
►
● Dynamic Contrast
◄
Medium
►
● Tint
0
◄
R
G
►
● Edge Enhancer
◄
High
►
● Colour Temp.
0
◄
W
C
►
● Noise Reduction
◄
Medium
►
● Dynamic Contrast
TruMotion
◄
Low
►
Picture Reset
2
►
◄
Off
Picture Reset
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 139 to 148)
Previous
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Previous
◄
115
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
Standard
►
Auto Volume
◄
Off
►
Clear Voice II
◄
Off
►
Balance
0
◄
L
R ►
Previous
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
116
1
2
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
MUSIC LIST
You can play music files on USB or PC storage device.
Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be
supported by this model.
Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file
Bit rate 32 to 320
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
1
Select MY MEDIA.
2
Select Music List.
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Preview: If any album jacket
for the file(Album Art Image)
exists, this jacket is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Contents under the folder
focused on 2
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
focused on 2
Page 1/1
Music List
USB1 External
1
Drive1
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
5
Move
Change Device
6
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Screen Components
To Movie List
Change Numbers
Play
P
Mark Mode
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
4
117
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Music Selection
Page 1/1
Music List
Drive1
USB1 External
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
Move
Change Device
To Movie List
Change Numbers
■■When playing music files
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
P
Page Change
Mark Mode
MARK
Mark
Exit
• Use the P
button to navigate up/down in
the music page.
Select the target folder or drive.
2
Select the desired music title.
3
Music files are played.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Movie List->Photo List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
EXIT
118
Play
Return to normal TV viewing.
■■When selected music files are played
Page 1/1
Music List
Mark Mode
Drive1
USB1 External
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
Page 1/1
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
Move
Play Marked
Select the target folder or drive.
2
3
Select the desired music title.
or
4
5
Convert to Mark Mode.
BLUE
Mark desired music file.
RED
Marked music file is played.
Unmark All
P
Page Change
Exit Mark Mode
MARK
Mark
Exit
• When one or more music files are marked,
the marked music title will be played in
sequence. For example, if you want to listen
to only one music repeatedly, just mark the
music only and play it. If no music is marked,
all the music in the folder will be played in
sequence.
• If you want to activate Random playback, you
must set Option->Set audio play.->Random
to On.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Mark All
Mark
119
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
RED
GREEN
Mark all music files on the screen.
YELLOW
Deselect all marked music files.
BLUE
Exit the Mark Mode.
EXIT
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
120
Display the selected music file.
Return to normal TV viewing.
Using the Music List function, play
Page 1/1
Music List
3 file(s) Marked
Drive1
USB1 External
Page 1/1
Choose options.
Set Audio Play.
►
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
■
1
II ◄◄ ►►
or
◄►
Play with Photo
007. - B07.mp3
00:00
008. - B08.mp3
00:00
Close
02:30 / 03:25
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio.
NOTE
►►Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
►►Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
►►You can listen to the music only within the device currently played.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
2
►
►
Set Audio.
006. - B06.mp3
00:00
121
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
■
►
II
◄◄ / ►►
Start playing the selected music files and then move to the Photo List.
GREEN
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
122
Stop the playing music file.
Press the PLAY(►) button to return to normal playback.
When you press the Pause(II) button while playing the file, the playback will be
paused.
When you press the Pause(II) button again while the playback is paused, it will
resume the playback.
When playing,
When you press the REW(◄◄) button, the previous music file will be played.
When you press the FF(►►) button, the next music file will be played.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 138)
Only Off/Screen Off operates from the Movie List, Photo List, Music List (LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only).
MENU
or
BACK
EXIT
<>
Q.MENU
Show the Option menu.
■■ When you press the Back button while the music is playing, the music player
currently playing will be hidden and only the music list will be displayed.
■■ When you press the Exit button while the Music player is displayed, only the
music will be stopped and the player will not return to normal TV viewing.
■■ When you press the Exit button while the music is stopped or while the music
player is hidden, the player will return to normal TV viewing.
■■ When using the < or > button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
be played.
■■When you select the Set Audio Play,
Set Audio Play.
Repeat
◄
On
►
Random
◄
Off
►
Previous
1
2
Select Repeat or Random.
Make appropriate adjustments.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
123
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■■When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
Standard
►
Auto Volume
◄
Off
►
Clear Voice II
◄
Off
►
Balance
0
◄
L
R ►
Previous
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
124
1
2
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
■■ If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the
play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a
screen saver.
■■ The ‘Screen Saver’?
Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an
fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
002. B02.mp3
► 00:31 / 04:04
NOTE
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
►►A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
►►A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate
information in playtime.
►►If you press OK, ■ buttons, screen saver is stopped.
►►The PLAY(►), Pause(II), ■ , ►►, ◄◄ buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.
►►You can use the ►► button to select the next music and the ◄◄ button to select the previous music.
125
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be
rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed.
(Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)
MY MEDIA
DivX Reg. Code
Deactivation
Movie List
Press OK(
Photo List
Close
) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
1
Previous
Music List
You must register your device to
play DivX protected videos.
Registration code : **********
Register at http://vod.divx.com
Exit
Select MY MEDIA.
2
BLUE
3
Select DivX Reg. Code.
Display DivX Reg. Code.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This
is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate
the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and
learn more about DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content”
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688;7,519,274”
NOTE
►Movie
►
files are supported as follows
Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels
Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)
►Video
►
Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6,
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.10-beta2, JPEG, VC1,
Sorenson H.263/H.264
126
DEACTIVATION
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the
available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD
allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any
of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this
added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage
their DivX VOD devices.
MY MEDIA
DivX Reg. Code
Deactivation
Movie List
Press OK(
Photo List
3
4
No
Exit
Select MY MEDIA.
BLUE
Select Deactivation.
Select Yes.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
2
Yes
) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
1
Previous
Music List
Deregistration code :
********
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com
Continue with registration?
Display Deactivation.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
127
GAME
GAME
Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV.
GAME
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
JUMP
OPTION
NETWORK
BLUETOOTH
MY MEDIA
GAME
HOLE IN ONE
SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER
WHACK A MOLE SUDOKU COOKING BURGER
URGENT SURVIVAL
Exit
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
GAME
Customer Support
1
2
3
Simple Manual
Exit
Select GAME.
Select the desired game.
Enter the selected game mode.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
128
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible
viewing options.
The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In
addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and
amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).
This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies.
You must set the Clock in the Time menu, before using EPG function.
The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days.
►
DTV 1 TV ONE
►
Pr. Change
► Next
Watch
Good Morning
21:00
00:00
Show/Game Show
16:9 720p
... HE-AAC
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
▼
Up
Down
Shows current programme information
Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme.
Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme.
Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
HE-AAC Displayed with a HE-AAC Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Plus Programme.
576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme
Broadcasted programme with the icon may not be displayed in Monitor Out depending on the information of the programme.
APP
Displayed with a MHP Programme.
Shows next programme information.
Tyra
2 TV2
◄ Now
Schedule
Remind
Tyra
21:00
Pr. Change
►
Record
DTV 2 TV2
►
28 Sep. 2008 21:00~00:00
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme.
Close
00:00
Show/Game Show
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
A pop-up window for record/remind settings
appear.
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
129
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Switch on/off EPG
1
Switch on or off EPG.
Select a programme
1
or
Select desired programme.
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode
You can view a programme being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.
RED
Change EPG mode.
Programme Guide
▲
That ’70s show
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
130
YELLOW
Enter Manual Timer mode.
ALL
NOW
1 YLE TV1
NEXT
That ’70s show
2 YLE TV2 Your World Today
4 TV..
Legenen om Den....
BLUE
Enter Schedule List mode.
When ‘NOW’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disappears
When ‘NEXT’ is selected, a reservation
pop-up window appears.
5 YLE FST Naturtimmen
6 CNN
Lyssna
8 YLE24
Glamour
FAV Favourite
INFO i Information
Mode
Keno
World Business
Fantomen
Kritiskt
ABC
Tänään otsikoissa
▼
Watch/Schedule
TV/RAD RADIO
Manual Timer
or
or
Schedule List
Switch off EPG.
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Detail information on or off.
Page Up/Down.
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode
Programme Guide
▲
That ’70s show
Change EPG mode.
ALL
14:00
Enter Date setting mode.
Kungskonsumente
Antigues Roadshow
The Drum
Mint Extra
TV2: Farmen
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
YELLOW
Enter Manual Timer mode.
8 YLE24
FAV Favourite
BLUE
Enter Schedule List mode.
When ‘Currently broadcasting programme’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disappears
When ‘Future broadcasting programme’
is selected, a reservation pop-up window
appears.
Select Programme.
...
▼
INFO i Information
Date
Watch/Schedule
Manual Timer
TV/RAD RADIO
Schedule List
Page Up/Down.
or
or
Switch off EPG.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
Detail information on or off.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Mode
Tue. 25 Nov.
15:00
▼
1 YLE TV1
GREEN
◄
RED
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
◄
131
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Button Function in Date Change Mode
Programme Guide
▲
That ’70s show
Change to the selected date.
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
◄
ALL
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
Switch off Date setting mode.
8 YLE24
15:00
▼
2 YLE TV2
Select a date.
Tue. 25 Nov.
14:00
1 YLE TV1
...
◄
GREEN Switch off Date setting mode.
Kungskonsumente
Antigues Roadshow
The Drum
Mint Extra
TV2: Farmen
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
▼
Date Change
or
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
132
or
Switch off EPG.
Date Exit
Button Function in Extended Description Box
The detail information on or off.
Text Up/Down.
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
or
Switch off EPG.
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
Fia World Touring Car Chanpionship
Tue. 25 Nov. 2008 10:05
12:40
Fia Champion
Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's
Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted
house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry
of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The
Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp;
Remind
Record
Close
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode
Sets a start or end time for recording, and sets only a start time for the reminder with the end time
grayed out.
This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been
connected to the TV-OUT(AV1) terminal, using a SCART cable.
Recording function is only supported in the Digital mode and not in the Analogue mode.
Manual Timer
Switch off Manual Timer mode.
Select the date to schedule.
Sun.
Select Remind or Record function setting.
09
16
Select Type, Start Time, End time or
Programme.
YELLOW Change to Guide mode.
BLUE
Mon.
Tue.
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009 13:46
Wed.
Select
type
10 a schedule
11
12
17
Type
Thu.
Fri.
13
14
18
Start 19
Time
20End
Record
24
25
15 26
: 09
17
27
Sat.
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009
15
21
Time
22
Programme
: 30
28
DTV29
801 ANTV D...
▲
23
No schedule list
Close
▼
30
31
01
Move
Programme Guide
02
03
OK
04
05
OK
Prev.
Exit
Schedule List
Change to Schedule List mode.
Save Timer Record/Remind.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
133
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Button Function in Schedule List Mode
If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled programme is displayed at the scheduled time even
when you are watching a different programme at the time.
Currently recording item cannot be edited or deleted.
Schedule List
Page1/1
Start Date
YELLOW Change to Manual Timer mode.
Change to Guide mode.
Switch off Schedule List.
Select programme.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
134
Page Up/Down.
6 May 16:00 Friend1
6 May 18:00 Friend2
Friend2
16:00
Modify
Modify
Delete
Delete All
Remind
DTV 19 Dave
(Fri.)06/05/2007
16:00
ꔀ Move
Manual Timer
Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/
Delete All).
Title
►
BLUE or
Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09
Start Time
Close
Modify/Delete
Programme Guide
P
Page Change
Exit
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan,
Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.
If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed
image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.
You can adjust the enlarge proportion using
button.
This function works in the following signal.
1
2
Select Aspect Ratio.
•Y
ou can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the
PICTURE menu.
•F
or Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Select the desired picture format.
• Original
When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will automatically change to the picture format broadcast.
Original
• Just Scan
Following Selection will lead to you view the
picture of best quality without loss of original
picture in high resolution image.
Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You
can see the noise at the edge.
Just Scan
PICTURE CONTROL
• 16:9
The following selection will allow you to adjust the picture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire
screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs).
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes
back to Q.Menu.
• Full Wide
When TV receives the wide screen signal,it will lead
you to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically, in
a linear proportion,to fill the entire screen fully.
4:3 and 14:9 video is supported in full screen without any video distortion through DTV input.
Full Wide
135
PICTURE CONTROL
• 4:3
The following selection will allow you to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.
• 14:9
You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV
programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is
viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is moved to the
up and down.
• Zoom
The following selection will allow you to view
the picture without any alteration, while filling
the entire screen. However, the top and bottom
of the picture will be cropped.
• Cinema Zoom
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture,
the image may become distorted.
PICTURE CONTROL
◄ or ► button: Adjust enlarge proportion of
Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16.
▼ or ▲ button: Move the screen.
NOTE
►►You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in Component mode.
►►You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode.
►►You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.
►►In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, Just Scan is available.
►►In Analogue/DTV/AV/Scart mode, Full Wide is available.
136
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.
Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can
calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage.
When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an
example.
In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not
applied.
PICTURE
● Aspect
Ratio
Move
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the
original image.
: 16:9
2
3
4
5
: Off
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
Previous
Select PICTURE.
Select Picture Wizard.
Adjust Standard(Black Level, White Level,
Tint, Colour, Horizontal Sharpness, Vertical
Sharpness, Backlight (LCD TV/LED LCD TV
only)) or Preferred(Black Level, White Level,
Tint, Colour, Sharpness, Dynamic Contrast,
Colour Temperature, Backlight (LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only)).
Select input source to apply the settings.
Next
• If you stop the setting before
the final stage, the changes
will not be applied
• The adjustment value is
saved to Expert1.
• Once the Picture Wizard sets
the image quality, the Energy
Saving is changed into Off.
• If the picture quality setting
of Expert1 is changed, use
the Picture Reset before
entering the Picture Wizard
to reset the picture quality
setting.
• Standard : mode to set standard picture quality.
• Preferred : mode to set user
preferred picture quality rather than standard picture.
PICTURE CONTROL
1
Mode
►
Energy Saving
● Picture
►
● Picture Wizard
●
Picture Wizard
OK
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
137
PICTURE CONTROL
ENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting
the Picture Mode.
When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is
finished.
Selecting ‘Screen Off’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PICTURE
Ratio
● Picture
Wizard
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
Off
Off
Select
Maximum
Screen Off
1
Select Auto, Off, Minimum ,
Medium, Maximum or Screen
Off.
Ratio
● Picture
Wizard
: 16:9
Intelligent Sensor
Auto
ꕊ Energy
Saving: Intelligent Sensor
: Off
Energy
Saving
Off
● Picture Mode
: Vivid
Minimum
• Contrast
100
Medium
• Brightness
50
Maximum
• Sharpness
70
Screen Off
• Colour
70
Medium
Energy Saving.
● Aspect
OK
●
●
Minimum
Select PICTURE.
Move
2
3
►
3
Mode
: Off
Auto
►
PICTURE CONTROL
2
: 16:9
ꕊ Energy
Saving: Off
Energy
Saving
● Picture
PICTURE
OK
►
● Aspect
●
●
1
Move
Plasma TV only
Select PICTURE.
Select
Energy Saving.
Select Intelligent Sensor, Off,
Minimum , Medium,
Maximum or Screen Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• When you select Screen Off, the screen will be turned off in 3 seconds and Screen Off will start.
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto, Maximum”, Backlight feature will not work. (LCD TV/LED LCD
TV only)
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Intelligent Sensor”, Sharpness, Colour, Colour Temperature feature
will not work. (Plasma TV only)
• You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control.
• When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the
surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV.
138
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS
Picture Mode-Preset
Vivid
Standard
Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.
The most general screen display status.
Optimizes power consumption. (Plasma TV Only)
Cinema or
Cinema Optimizes video for watching movies.
Bright Room
This is the specification to optimize TV viewing in Bright Room. (42/47/55LE8***,
Plasma TV Only)
Sport
Optimizes video for watching sports events.
Game
Optimizes video for playing games.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PICTURE
Ratio
● Picture
Wizard
●
● Aspect
: 16:9
Ratio
Move
OK
: 16:9
● Picture
Energy Saving
●●Picture
Mode
Picture
Mode
PICTURE
OK
Wizard
Vivid
Energy Saving : Intelligent Sensor
Standard
PictureMode
Mode
●●Picture
::Vivid
: Off
●
Standard
::Standard
►
• Contrast
100
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
50
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
70
Sport
70
Game
Vivid
Vivid
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Cinema
Bright Room
Expert1
Expert2
►
Intelligent Sensor
►
Intelligent Sensor
►
● Aspect
Move
Plasma TV only
►
►
Cinema
Cinema
Bright Room
Game
Sport
ꕋ Expert1
Game
ꕋ Expert2
ꕋ Expert1
PICTURE CONTROL
Sport
ꕋ Expert2
(Except for 42/47/55LE8***)
1
2
3
(only 42/47/55LE8***)
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
Select Intelligent Sensor,
Vivid, Standard,
Cinema(Except for
42/47/55LE8***),
Cinema(Only 42/47/55LE8***),
Bright Room(Only
42/47/55LE8***), Sport or
Game.
3
Select PICTURE.
Select Picture Mode.
Select Vivid, Standard,
Cinema,
Bright
Room, Sport or Game.
,
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
139
PICTURE CONTROL
• Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the
Picture Mode menu based on the programme category.
• When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted
according to the surrounding conditions.
• You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q. Menu.
• Intelligent Sensor : Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions.
•
(Auto Power Saving) : Maximize reducting the power consumption without hurting the picture quality. (Plasma TV Only)
• If you adjust “Picture ModeCinema,
Bright Room”, “Energy Saving-Intelligent Sensor,
Minimum, Medium, Maximum” feature will not work. (Plasma TV Only)
• If you adjust “Picture ModeCinema,
Bright Room”, “Energy Saving-Auto, Minimum,
Medium, Maximum” feature will not work. (42/47/55LE8*** Only)
• If you adjust “Picture Mode”, “Energy Saving-Off, Minimum, Medium, Maximum” feature will
not work. (Plasma TV only)
Cinema(42/47/55LE8***, Plasma TV Only) :This is cinema quality mode to provide you the
experience of watching a movie at home.The user will be able enjoy the best level of satisfactory
screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments.Cinema expresses the optimal
screen quality when it is darkest.
When selecting
Cinema,
Bright Room Aspect ratio changes to Just scan.
•
Cinema(Thomlinson Holman ’s Experiment)is the audio and video certification standard of
THX established by George Lucas,who directed the movie Star Wars,and Thomlinson.
This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds
the display standard specification in both hardware and software.
•
PICTURE CONTROL
140
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT
Picture Mode-User option
Backlight (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.
Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.
Contrast
Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright
part of the picture is saturated.
Brightness
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Colour
Adjusts intensity of all colours.
Tint
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
Colour Temp.
Adjust to left direction to make a picture reddish or adjust to right direction to make a picture bluish.
It is not available to use this function in “Intelligent Sensor”.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
Plasma TV only
PICTURE
Ratio
● Picture
Wizard
●
PICTURE
OK
● Aspect
: 16:9
Ratio
Move
OK
: 16:9
● Picture
Energy Saving
●●Picture
Mode
Picture
Mode
Wizard
Vivid
Energy Saving : Intelligent Sensor
Standard
PictureMode
Mode
●●Picture
::Vivid
: Off
●
Standard
::Standard
70
• Contrast
100
• Brightness
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
Vivid
Vivid
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
50
Cinema
Bright Room
70
Sport
70
Game
Expert1
Expert2
►
Intelligent Sensor
►
Intelligent Sensor
100
►
• Contrast
• Backlight
►
● Aspect
Move
►
►
Cinema
Cinema
Game
Sport
ꕋ Expert1
Game
ꕋ Expert2
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
(Except for 42/47/55LE8***)
1
2
3
4
5
(only 42/47/55LE8***)
1
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
Select Vivid, Standard,
Cinema(Except for
42/47/55LE8***), Sport or Game.
Select Backlight, Contrast,
Brightness, Sharpness,
Colour, Tint or Colour Temp..
Make appropriate adjustments.
3
4
5
Select PICTURE.
PICTURE CONTROL
Bright Room
Sport
Select Picture Mode.
Select Vivid, Standard, Sport
or Game.
Select Contrast, Brightness,
Sharpness, Colour, Tint or
Colour Temp..
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
141
PICTURE CONTROL
• Benefits of using Backlight
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
- The electricity consumption is reduced by up to 60 %.
- The black brightness is reduced. (As the black has greater depth, you can enjoy a better quality
definition.)
- You can adjust brightness with maintaining original signal resolution.
NOTE
►You
►
cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.
►►When the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, H Sharpness,
V Sharpness, Colour or Tint.
PICTURE CONTROL
142
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special
video screen.
You can set the video value differently for each input.
To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the
“Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
PICTURE
OK
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
►
• Advanced
Advanced Control
Control
►
• Tint
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion
: Off
• TruMotion
• Screen
• Screen
Move
OK
Dynamic Contrast
• Sharpness
70
Dynamic Colour
• Colour
R60
G
Clear White
• Tint
C
W0
Skin Colour
• Colour Temp.
◄ Medium
►
Medium
Off
0
Reduction
• Advanced
Control
AdvancedNoise
Control
Medium
Digital Noise Reduction
• Picture Reset
Medium
: Off
Medium
Gamma
Black Level
Auto
3
4
R
Noise Reduction
►
High
G
Medium
Gamma
Medium
Black Level
Auto
Film Mode
Off
Colour Gamut
Wide
▼
▼
Close
Plasma TV only
Select PICTURE.
Select Advanced Control.
Select your desired Source.:
Dynamic Contrast, Dynamic Colour, Clear White(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only),
Skin Colour (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Noise Reduction, Digital Noise
Reduction (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Gamma, Black Level, Eye Care (LCD TV/
LED LCD TV only), Real Cinema (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Film Mode(Plasma
TV only), Colour Gamut, Edge Enhancer (Plasma TV only) or xvYCC. (Refer to p.
145 to 146)
PICTURE CONTROL
2
◄ High
Close
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
1
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Colour
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
143
PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
By segmenting categories, Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they
see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users.
This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PICTURE
● Aspect
Ratio
● Picture
Wizard
●
Energy Saving
Mode
Picture
Mode
●●Picture
Move
PICTURE
OK
: 16:9
::
OK
◄ Medium
• V Sharpness
Digital Noise 60
Reduction
Intelligent Sensor
: Off
Move
Dynamic Contrast
• H Sharpness
70
Noise Reduction
Vivid
Expert1 Standard
Standard
• Backlight
70
Cinema
• Contrast
90
Sport
• Brightness
50
Game
• TruMotion
• Screen
• H Sharpness ꕋ
70 Expert1
Expert1
• Colour
60 R
Black Level
• Tint
0
Real Cinema
Advanced
Control
•• Expert
Control
Colour Gamut
• Picture Reset
: Off Edge Enhancer
G
xvYCC
Expert Pattern
Expert2
►
Medium
Noise Reduction
Medium
Gamma
Auto
Black Level
On
Film Mode
EBU
Colour Gamut
High
Edge Enhancer
Auto
xvYCC
Off
▼
Close
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
1
PICTURE CONTROL
2
3
4
5
6
Dynamic Contrast
◄ Off
Medium
Auto
Off
Standard
Off
Auto
Expert Pattern
Off
▼
Close
Plasma TV only
Select PICTURE.
Select Picture Mode.
Select
Expert1 or
Expert2.
Select Expert Control.
Select your desired Source.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
144
►
Off
*This feature is not available for all models.
Dynamic Contrast
■■ Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of
(Off/Low/Medium(LCD
the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark
TV/LED LCD TV only)/
parts darker.
High)
■■ Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feaDynamic Colour
ture enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and
(Off/Low/High )
white look more vivid.
Skin Colour
■■ Adjusts skin colour of the picture so that user can set his favourite skin
colour.
(-5 to 5)
Noise Reduction
(Off/Low/Medium/High/ ■■ Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Auto(In Analogue Mode
Only))
Digital Noise Reduction
■■ Reduces noise regarding MPEG compressed video.
(Low/Medium/High/Off)
Gamma
(Advanced Control:
Low/Medium/High
Expert Control:
1.9/2.2/2.4)
• Low : The picture of the screen gets darker.
• High : The picture of the screen gets brighter.
• Auto : Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to
the input signal level.
■■ This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode:
AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.
Clear White
(Off/Low/High)
■■ Makes the white area of the screen brighter and clearer.
Eye Care
(Low/High/Off)
*This feature is not available for all models.
■■ Adjusts the brightness of the screen automatically to the best level for
eyes when the screen is too bright.
■■ This feature is disable in “Picture Mode-Vivid, Cinema, Expert1,
Expert2, Intelligent Sensor”.
Real Cinema(LCD TV/
LED LCD TV only)/
Film Mode
(Plasma TV only)
(On/Off)
PICTURE CONTROL
Black Level
(Low/High/Auto)
■■ You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
• Low/1.9 : Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.
• Medium/2.2 : Expresses original picture levels.
• High/2.4: Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.
■■ When Antenna is used as input signal, it is set to Medium and deactivated.
(Plasma TV only)
■■ You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect.
■■ Uses this function when you watch film-originated movie contents.
■■ This function can work when TruMotion is off.
145
PICTURE CONTROL
Colour Gamut
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV :
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display charAdvanced Control
acteristics.
& Plasma TV :
Advanced Control/
• Wide: Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
Expert Control)
(Wide/Standard)
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display charColour Gamut
acteristics.
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV • Wide : Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
: Expert Control)
• EBU : Mode to display EBU colour area.
(EBU/SMPTE/BT709/
• SMPTE : Mode to display SMPTE colour area.
Wide/Standard)
• BT709 : Mode to display BT709 colour area.
Edge Enhancer
■■ Makes the edge of the picture clearer and distinctive.
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV
■■ This function can use in “Picture Mode-Expert.” (LCD TV/LED LCD TV
:Off/Low/High
only)
Plasma TV:On/Off)
*This feature is not available for all models.
xvYCC
■■ This is the function to express richer colour.
(Auto/off/on)
■■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC signal is inputted through HDMI
Expert Pattern
■■ This is the pattern necessary for checking the picture of Digital TV.
(Off/Pattern1/Pattern2) ■■ This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.
Colour Filter
■■ This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.
(Off/Red/Green/Blue) You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
PICTURE CONTROL
Colour Temperature
(Medium/Warm/Cool)
Colour Management
System
146
This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.
a. • Method : 2 Points
• Pattern: Inner, Outer
• Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. • Method : 10 point IRE(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 20 Point IRE(Plasma TV)
• Pattern: Inner / Outer
• IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 5, 10, 15 to
100(Plasma TV). You can adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.
• Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma.
You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance
value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE. (LCD
TV/LED LCD TV)
• Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
■■ As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively
adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general video.
■■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour : The adjustment
range is -30 to +30.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment
range is -30 to +30.
■■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
PICTURE
OK
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
: Off
• Screen
1
3
4
60
OK
►
• Advanced Control
• TruMotion
Yes
No
: Off
• Screen
Select PICTURE.
PICTURE CONTROL
2
• Colour
•• Picture
Picture Reset
Reset
►
• TruMotion
70
• Tint ? All picture
0 Rsettings willG be reset.
C
• Colour Temp.
Continue?W
• Advanced Control
•• Picture
Picture Reset
Reset
Move
• Sharpness
Select Picture Reset.
Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
147
PICTURE CONTROL
TRUMOTION
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV ONLY)
It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image
or Film Source.
High : Provide smoother picture movement.
Low : Provide smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
Off : Turn off TruMotion Operation.
User : User can adjust Judder and Blur level in TruMotion Operation, separately.
- Judder : Adjust noise of the screen.
- Blur : Adjust after-image of the screen.
This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode.
If you enable "TruMotion", noise may appear on the screen.
If this occurs, set "TruMotion" to "Off".
If you select “Picture Mode-Game ”, set “TruMotion" to "Off".
PICTURE
Move
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
OK
TruMotion
• Tint
0
R
G
• Colour Temp.
0
W
C
• Advanced Control
: Off
3
● Blur
3
►
OK
►
••TruMotion
TruMotion
►
• Picture Reset
◄ Low
● Judder
• Screen
PICTURE CONTROL
1
2
3
4
Select PICTURE.
Select TruMotion.
Select Low, High, User or Off.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
148
LED LOCAL DIMMING
(Only 42/47/55LE5***, 42/47/55LE7***, 42/47/55LE8***)
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve
the contrast ratio.
1
2
PICTURE
OK
60
• Tint
0
R
• Colour Temp. 0
W
• TruMotion
Move
OK
• Colour
60
G
• Tint
0
R
G
C
• Colour Temp. 0
W
C
• Advanced Control
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Picture Reset
: Off
• TruMotion
: Off
• Screen
Off
•• LED
LED Local
Local Dimming
Dimming :: On
On
•• LED
LED Local
Local Dimming
Dimming :: On
On
On
Teletext
►
• Screen
►
• Colour
Select PICTURE.
Select LED Local Dimming.
PICTURE CONTROL
3
Move
►
PICTURE
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
149
PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV ONLY)
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.
Standby Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode.
Power Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns
on.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: UK
● Factory
● Set
● IR
PICTURE CONTROL
2
3
4
Reset
ID
● Mode
Setting
Blaster
Standby Light
● Power Indicator
►
● Power Indicator
● Factory
:1
● Set
: Home Use
● Mode
: Off
● IR
Setting
Blaster
◄
Power Light
Reset
ID
OK
: UK
● Disability Assistance
►
● Disability Assistance
1
Move
On
►
On
:1
: Home Use
Close
: Off
Select OPTION.
Select Power Indicator.
Select Standby Light or Power Light.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
150
IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD
(PLASMA TV ONLY)
A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image
remaining even when you change the image. Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for
prolonged periods.
White Wash
White wash removes permanent images from the screen.
Note: An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash.
Orbiter
Orbiter may help prevent ghost images. However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain
on the screen. To avoid a permanent image on the screen, the screen will move every 2 minutes.
Colour Wash
The colour block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is
difficult to sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour
pattern is operating.
Move
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: UK
ID
● Mode
Blaster
►
● Set
: Home Use
● Mode
: Off
● IR
ID
Setting
Blaster
:1
: Home Use
Orbiter
Colour Wash
White Wash
: Off
• If you do not need this function, set Normal.
Select OPTION.
2
Select ISM Method.
3
4
Setting
:1
Reset
Normal
Standard
PICTURE CONTROL
● IR
● Factory
Reset
: Normal
►
● Set
● ISM
Method
Power
Indicator
►
● Factory
: Normal
►
● ISM
Method
Power
Indicator
OK
: UK
● Disability Assistance
● Disability Assistance
1
Move
● Language(Language)
►
OPTION
Select Normal, Orbiter, Colour
Wash or White Wash.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
151
PICTURE CONTROL
MODE SETTING
We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use ” mode for the best picture in your home environment.
“Store Demo ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: UK
● Disability Assistance
● Disability Assistance
● Power
● Power
Indicator
● Factory
ID
: UK
Selecting the environment.
Indicator
● Factory
Choose the setting mode you want.
Reset
:1
● Set
● Mode Setting
:: Home
Home Use
Use
● Mode Setting
Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use
:: Home
this TV at store, select [Store Demo].
Home Use
Use
● IR
: Off
● IR
: Off
Blaster
►
● Set
Reset
ID
OK
Blaster
:1
Store Demo
Home Use
● Demo
Mode
Off
Close
PICTURE CONTROL
1
Select OPTION.
2
Select Mode Setting.
3
4
Select Store Demo or Home Use.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
152
DEMO MODE
It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode.
In Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.
Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is
reset.
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
OK
Move
● Language(Language)
● Language(Language)
● Country
● Country
: UK
● Disability Assistance
● Disability Assistance
● Power
● Power
Indicator
● Factory
ID
: UK
Selecting the environment.
Indicator
● Factory
Choose the setting mode you want.
Reset
:1
● Set
● Mode Setting
:: Home
Home Use
Use
● Mode Setting
Select [Store Demo] to use this TV in store. To use
:: Home
this TV at home, select [Home Use].
Home Use
Use
● IR
: Off
● IR
: Off
Blaster
►
● Set
Reset
OK
ID
Blaster
:1
Store Demo
Home Use
● Demo
Mode
On
Close
1
3
4
5
Select Mode Setting.
Select Store Demo.
Select On.
PICTURE CONTROL
2
Select OPTION.
Move to the previous menu screen.
If you want to stop the demo, press any button.
(except for MUTE,
+ , - button)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
153
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME LEVELER
Auto Volume automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making
automatic adjustments for each programme.
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home theater system or amp to cope with different user environments.
AUDIO
Move
● Clear
Voice II
: Off
3
● Balance
● Sound
1
2
3
Mode
AUDIO
OK
: Off
● Auto
● Clear
0
L
: Standard
R
Move
Volume
Voice II
: Off
● Balance
● Sound
Mode
OK
MHEG
Off
: Off
3
►
Volume
►
● Auto
On
0
L
R
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
Select AUDIO.
Select Auto Volume.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
154
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
AUDIO
Volume
: Off
Off
:: Off
● Balance
● Sound
1
2
33
0
L
R
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
Select AUDIO.
Move
Volume
Clear Voice
Voice II
II
●●Clear
: Off
Off
:: Off
● Sound
Mode
● Clear
33
● Balance
OK
L
0 ● Level
Voice II
R
◄
3
Off
-
5
+
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
Close
• If you select “On” for Clear Voice II,
Infinite Sound feature will not work.
• Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’.
Select Clear Voice II.
Select On or Off.
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On
4
►
Select Level.
Make desired adjustment.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
Mode
● Auto
►
Clear Voice
Voice II
II
●●Clear
AUDIO
OK
►
● Auto
Move
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
155
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE
You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can
also adjust the Treble, Bass.
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appropriate sound options based on the programme content.
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.
Standard
Music
Cinema
Sport
Game
Offers standard-quality sound.
Optimizes sound for listening to music.
Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Optimizes sound for watching sports events.
Optimizes sound for playing games.
AUDIO
Move
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
: Off
3
Standard
:: Standard
3
Volume
● Clear
0
L
R
Voice II
Move
OK
: Off
: Off
● Balance
3
L
Standard
0 Standard
Standard
:: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Infinite Sound : OffCinema
• Treble
50 Sport
• Bass
50
• Bass
• Reset
• Reset
Select AUDIO.
R
Music
Sound Mode
Mode
●●Sound
►
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
Sound Mode
Mode
●●Sound
● Auto
►
● Balance
1
AUDIO
OK
: Off
►
● Auto
50 Game
• You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q.
Menu.
Select Sound Mode.
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or
Game.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
156
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE
AUDIO
Move
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
: Off
● Auto
3
4
5
Sound Mode
Mode
●●Sound
Standard(User)
:: Standard
L
R
Voice II
Move
OK
: Off
: Off
3
L
R
Standard(User)
0 Standard
● Balance
►
3
0
Music
Sound Mode
Mode
●●Sound
Standard(User)
:: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Infinite Sound : OffCinema
• Treble
50 Sport
• Bass
50
• Bass
• Reset
• Reset
►
2
Volume
● Clear
● Balance
1
AUDIO
OK
: Off
►
● Auto
50 Game
Select AUDIO.
Select Sound Mode.
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or
Game.
Select Treble or Bass.
Set the desired sound level.
INFINITE SOUND
Select this option to sound realistic.
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select Infinite Sound.
Infinite Sound : Infinite Sound is a patented
LG proprietary sound processing technology
that strives immersive 5.1 surround sound
impression with front two loudspeakers.
Select On or Off.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
157
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.
AUDIO
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
: Off
: Off
1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
Mode
● Auto
3
00
L
R
Move
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
Mode
OK
: Off
: Off
●● Balance
Balance
►
●● Balance
Balance
● Sound
AUDIO
OK
►
● Auto
Move
3
0●0LBalance
: Standard
● Sound
• Infinite Sound : Off
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
R
0◄
L
R
Close
Select AUDIO.
Select Balance.
Make desired adjustment.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
158
►
TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP
You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.
In AV, COMPONENT, RGB and HDMI1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational
even when there is no video signal.
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
● Sound
Move
Mode
AUDIO
OK
: Standard
● Sound
Move
Mode
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
: PCM
● Digital Audio
: :On
On
●●TV
TVSpeaker
Speaker
Out
● DTV Audio
1
Setting : Auto
►
●●TV
TVSpeaker
Speaker
►
● Digital Audio
● DTV Audio
Out
OK
: Standard
: PCM
: :On
On
Setting : Auto
Off
On
PCM
►
AUDIO
Select AUDIO.
2
Select TV Speaker.
3
Select On or Off.
NOTE
►►When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automatically switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the
TV speaker.
►►Some menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
159
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type
you want.
AUDIO
● Sound
Move
Mode
AUDIO
OK
: Standard
● Sound
Move
Mode
OK
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
Auto
Auto
: PCM
● Digital Audio
: PCM
HE-AAC
: On
● TV
: On
Dolby Digital+
: :Auto
Auto
Dolby Digital
● TV
Out
Speaker
DTVAudio
AudioSetting
Setting
●●DTV
Auto
: :Auto
Out
Speaker
● DTV Audio Setting
50
►
● Digital Audio
►
MPEG
1
2
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
160
3
Select AUDIO.
Select DTV Audio Setting.
Select Auto, HE-AAC, Dolby Digital +, Dolby
Digital or MPEG.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
•Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > Dolby Digital > MPEG.
(Except for Italy)
Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > MPEG > Dolby Digital.
(Only Italy)
•HE-AAC, Dolby Digital +, Dolby Digital, MPEG: Allows users to select the audio type they want.
ex) If MPEG is selected, MPEG is always outputted.
If MPEG is not supported, another audio type is set in that order.
• Refer to p. 167 to 168 (Audio Language Selection)
SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.
The TV can only output Dolby Digital if a channel is broadcast with Dolby Digital audio.
When Dolby Digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony
Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available, SPDIF output will
be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby
Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.
Move
Mode
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
● TV
Speaker
● DTV Audio
1
3
: :PCM
PCM
● Sound
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
● TV
Setting : Auto
Speaker
● DTV Audio
Out
OK
: Standard
● Digital Audio
: On
: :PCM
PCM
: On
Auto
PCM
PCM
Setting : Auto
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Select AUDIO.
Select Digital Audio Out.
Select Auto or PCM.
Move
Mode
• There is a possibility that when HDMI mode,
some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound.
At that time, set the output of the digital audio of
the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital
Plus is not supported).
Item
Audio Input
Digital Audio output
Auto(Speaker On)
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
HE-AAC
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
PCM
Auto(Speaker Off)
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
HE-AAC
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
All
PCM
PCM
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
Out
AUDIO
►
● Digital Audio
OK
: Standard
►
● Sound
►
AUDIO
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
161
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
AUDIO
Mode
: Standard
● Sound
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
• Bass
• Reset
• Reset
Speaker
● DTV Audio
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
4
Out
►
● TV
2
Move
● Digital Audio
1
AUDIO
OK
►
● Sound
Move
Mode
: Standard
50
? All audio settings will be resetted.
: PCM
● Digital Audio
: On
● TV
Setting : Auto
OK
Speaker
● DTV Audio
Out
: PCM
50
Continue?
Yes
No
: On
Setting : Auto
Select AUDIO.
Select Reset.
Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
162
AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV
programme in addition to the basic audio.
When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those
programmes that have Audio Description included.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Country
: UK
Indicator
● Factory
● Set
● IR
1
2
3
● Power
Reset
ID
● Mode
►
● Power
● Country
●● Disability Assistance
►
●● Disability Assistance
Setting
Blaster
Move
OK
● Language(Language)
● Set
: Home Use
● Mode
: Off
● IR
• Volume
Reset
ID
Setting
Blaster
)
Off
Audio Description
Indicator
● Factory
:1
: UK Hard of Hearing(
:1
• Beep
: Home Use
: Off
◄ On ►
0
-
+
Off
Close
Select OPTION.
Select Disability Assistance.
Select Audio Description.
4
5
Select Volume or Beep.
Make desired adjustment.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
163
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
I/II
STEREO/DUAL RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme
number and station name.
1
Select Audio or Audio Language.
2
Select the sound output.
Broadcast
MONO
Stereo
STEREO
Dual
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
164
On Screen Display
Mono
DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II
■■ Mono sound selection
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the
clarity of sound is improved.
■■ Language selection for dual language broadcast
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I,
DUAL II or DUAL I+II.
DUAL ISends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
DUAL IISends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
DUAL I+II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.
NICAM RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.
1
When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.
2
When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO.
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.
3
When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or
NICAM DUAL I+II or FM MONO.
SPEAKER SOUND OUTPUT SELECTION
Select the sound output.
L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from
audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.
L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and
right loudspeakers.
165
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY
SELECTION
The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.
1
Select your desired language.
2
Select your country. (Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE59**, 32/37/42/47/55LE79**, 42/47/55LE89**,
32/37/42/47/55LD69**, 32/42/47LD79**, 32/37/42LD89**, 50/60PK59*, 50/60PK79**, 50/60PK99**)
* If you want to change Language/ Country selection
1
2
Select Language(Language).
3
Select Menu Language.
4
5
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
166
1
Select OPTION.
Select your desired language.
Save.
Select OPTION.
2
Select Country.
3
Select your country.
4
5
Select Yes or No.
Save.
(Except for 32/37/42/47/55LE59**, 32/37/42/47/55LE79**,
42/47/55LE89**, 32/37/42/47/55LD69**, 32/42/47LD79**,
32/37/42LD89**, 50/60PK59*, 50/60PK79**, 50/60PK99**)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NOTE
►►If you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you time out on the OSD (On
Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the
TV is switched on.
►►If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems
may occur during teletext operation.
►►The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances.
►►DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances.
►►In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on
digital broadcasting circumstances.
►►The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK.
►►If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial digital standard broadcasting programmes are available, but some DTV functions may not work properly.
LANGUAGE SELECTION
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a
selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.
When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language and Text
Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category.
In Digital mode, use the Text language function when two or more Text languages are broadcast. If teletext
data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default Text language page will be displayed.
1
2
Select Language(Language).
3
Select Audio Language, Subtitle
Language or Text Language(Except
for UK).
4
Select your desired language.
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select Disability Assistance.
Select Hard of Hearing(
).
Select On or Off.
Save.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
5
1
Select OPTION.
167
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Audio Language OSD Information
< Audio Language Selection >
►►When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can
select the audio language.
1
2
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
MPEG Audio
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
Select Audio or Audio Language.
Dolby Digital Plus Audio
HE-AAC
HE-AAC Audio
Select an audio language.
< Subtitle Language Selection >
►►When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you
can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button
on the remote control.
►►Press the
button to select a subtitle language.
Subtitle Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
- The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service provider.
- When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output a part of
the Main audio.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
168
TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETUP
The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal in Auto mode. You can set the clock
manually in Manual mode.
You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.
The TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal.
When if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.
Time Zone menu can be changed in Auto mode.
TIME
Move
TIME
OK
Move
● Clock
►
● Clock
● Off
Time
: Off
● Off
Time
● On
Time
: Off
● On
Time
: Off
● Sleep
● Sleep
Timer
Timer
◄Move
: Off
Date
: Off
Month
: Off
Year
OK
OK
►
Auto
3
Mar.
2008
Hour
16
Minute
09
Time Zone
London
GMT
Close
1
3
4
5
Select Clock.
Select Auto or Manual.
TIME SETTING
2
Select TIME.
Select either the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option.
Set the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
169
TIME SETTING
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.
Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to standby mode unless a button has been pressed.
The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.
TIME
Move
TIME
OK
● Clock
● Clock
Time
: Off
● Off
● On Time
: Off
● On Time
● Sleep
: Off
►
Timer
►
● Off
Move
Time
● Sleep
Timer
OK
1 Mar 2007 16:09
: Off
Repeat
◄
Off
: Off
Hour
00
: Off
Minute
00
Input
►
Antenna
Programme
TV1
Volume
30
Close
1
2
3
TIME SETTING
4
5
6
•T
o cancel On/Off Time function, select Off.
Select TIME.
•F
or On Time function only
Select Off Time or On Time.
2
Select Repeat.
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon. ~ Fri.,
Mon. ~ Sat., Sat. ~ Sun. or Sun..
Set the hour.
1
3
4
Select Input.
Select the input source.
Set the programme.
Adjust volume level at switch-on.
Set the minutes.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
170
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.
The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.
1
2
Select Sleep Timer.
Select Off, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180 or 240 min.
•W
hen you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.
•Y
ou can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu.
TIME SETTING
171
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Enter the password, press ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ on the remote control handset.
When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ but ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’.
When France is selected for Country, password cannot be set as ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’.
If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
LOCK
● Set
● Parental
3
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
4
5
►
● Input
►
● Block
Lock
LOCK
Programme
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
: :Off
Off
● Block
● Parental
● Input
● Key
Select LOCK.
OK
Off
Off
● Lock System
: Off
Move
Password
Lock
Programme
►
: :Off
Off
● Key
2
OK
● Set
● Lock System
1
Move
Password
On
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
: Off
• If you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’,
‘2’, ‘5’ on the remote control handset.
Select Lock System.
Select On.
Set the password.
Input a 4-digit password.
Be sure to remember this number!
Re-enter new password for confirm.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
172
BLOCK PROGRAMME
Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
RADIO
DTV
LOCK
● Set
Move
Password
● Lock
System
: On
● Block
● Parental
● Input
● Key
OK
Lock
Programme
Page 1/1
C
TV
1 Nine Digital
2 Nine Digital HD
3 Nine Guide
4 7 Digital
5 7 HD Digital
6 7 Digital 1
7 7 Digital2
8 7 Digital3
9 7 Guide
▲
▼
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
: Off
Pr. Change
Navigation
Page Change
P
Previous
Block/Unblock
or
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
Page 1/1
C
Cable Radio
Cable DTV
Cable TV
1 Nine Digital
2 Nine Digital HD
3 Nine Guide
4 7 Digital
5 7 HD Digital
6 7 Digital 1
7 7 Digital2
8 7 Digital3
9 7 Guide
Pr. Change
Navigation
P
Page Change
Previous
Block/Unblock
1
Select LOCK.
3
4
5
Select Lock System.
Select Block Programme.
Enter the Block Programme.
YELLOW
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
2
Select a programme to be locked.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
173
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal
has incorrect information, this function does not operate.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Rating differs by country.
LOCK
● Set
Move
LOCK
OK
Password
● Lock
System
● Set
: On
● Lock
● Block
●● Parental
Parental Guidance
Guidance:: Blocking
Blocking Off
Off
● Input
● Key
Lock
Programme
▲
▼
Block
: Off
Move
System
: On
OK
Blocking Off : Permits all
programmes
▲
Password
Programme 12 and above
13 and above
● Block
●● Parental
Parental Guidance
Guidance:: Blocking
Blocking Off
Off
● Input
● Key
Lock
: Off
Block
14 and above
12 and above
▲
▼
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
3
4
14 and above
15 and above
16 and above
16 and above
17 and above
17 and above
18 and above
18 and above
Blocking Off
(Except for France)
2
13 and above
15 and above
1
Programmes for 18 and above will
be blocked
▲
(Only France)
Select LOCK.
Select Lock System.
Select Parental Guidance.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
174
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
■■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LOCK
● Set
Move
Password
● Lock
System
● Set
: On
● Block
● Parental
● Input
Lock
Programme
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
▲
▼
: Off
● AV1 Move
System
● Block
● Parental
● Input
Lock
: Off
Guidance
: Blocking Off
● HDMI1
● HDMI2
►
Off
Programme
● RGB
Block
Off
Off
● Component
: On
● Key
OK ◄
● AV2
Password
● Lock
● Key
LOCK
OK
Off
▲
▼
Off
Off
● HDMI3
Off
● HDMI4
Off
Close
1
2
3
5
Select Lock System.
Select Input Block.
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
4
Select LOCK.
Select input source.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
175
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
KEY LOCK
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so
that it can only be used with the remote control.
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.
LOCK
Move
● Lock
System
3
: Off
● Lock
● Block
Programme
● Parental
● Input
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
: Off: Off
Select LOCK.
Select Key Lock.
Select On or Off.
Move
OK
Password
System
: Off
● Block
● Parental
● Input
● Key Lock
Programme
Guidance: Blocking Off
Block
Off
: :Off
Off
Off
►
2
● Set
● Key
Lock
● Key
Lock
1
LOCK
OK
Password
►
● Set
On
• In Key Lock ‘On’, if the TV is turned off, press the
/ I, INPUT, P
button on the TV or POWER
INPUT, P
or NUMBER buttons on the remote
control then the set will be turned on.
• With the Key Lock On, the display ‘
Key
Lock On ’ appears on the screen if any button on
the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV.
• When another OSD is displayed, ‘
Key Lock
On ’ will not operate.
PARENTAL CONTROL /
RATINGS
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
176
TELETEXT
This feature is not available in all countries.
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-theminute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and
many other topics.
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT
systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are
selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and
FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of
teletext information.
SWITCH ON/OFF
Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page
viewed appears on the screen.
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the
screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the second shows the current page displayed.
Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears.
SIMPLE TEXT
■■ Page selection
Enter
1
the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selection you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the
correct page number.
2 The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
TELETEXT
177
TELETEXT
TOP TEXT
The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow
field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.
■■ Block / group / page selection
1 With the blue button you can progress from block to block.
2 Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.
3 With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next
group.
button can be used.
4 Alternatively the P
The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used.
■■ Direct page selection
As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using
the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.
FASTEXT
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the
corresponding coloured button.
■■Page selection
1
2
3
TELETEXT
178
4
Press the T.OPT button and then use
button to select
menu. Display the index page.
You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding
coloured buttons.
AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with
the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
■■ Press the T. OPT button and then use
button to select the Text Option menu.
■■ In UK(In digital mode), T. OPT button does not work.
Text Option
■■Index
Select the each index page.
Index
Time
Hold
Reveal
■■Time
Update
Close
When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right
hand corner of the screen.
In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN,< > or NUMBER buttons.
■■ Hold
Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages.
The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the
time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the
screen and the automatic page change is inactive.
■■Reveal
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.
■■Update
Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at
the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to
the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page.
TELETEXT
179
DIGITAL TELETEXT
*This function works in UK, Ireland only.
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text,
graphics etc.
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast
digital teletext.
TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE
1
Press the numeric or P
button to select a
digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Follow the indications on digital teletext and
move onto the next step by pressing TEXT,
OK,
, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE
or NUMBER buttons and etc..
3
To change digital teletext service, select a different service by the numeric or P
button.
TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE
DIGITAL TELETEXT
180
1
Press the numeric or P
button to select a
certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on
teletext.
3
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move
onto the next step by pressing OK,
, RED,
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and
so on.
4
Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off
digital teletext and return to TV viewing.
Some services may allow you to access text services by pressing the RED button.
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
The TV does not operate properly.
The remote control
does not work
■■ Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote control causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
■■ Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
■■ Install new batteries.
■■ Is the sleep timer set?
Power is suddenly
■■ Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.
turned off
■■ If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off automatically after 15 minutes.
The video function does not work.
■■ Check whether the TV is switched on.
■■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
No picture & No sound ■■ Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?
■■ Check your antenna direction and/or location.
■■ Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.
Picture appears slowly ■■ This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact
your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.
after switching on
■■ Adjust Colour in menu option.
No or poor colour
or poor picture
■■ Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.
■■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■■ Are the video cables installed properly?
■■ Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
Poor reception on
some channels
Lines or streaks
in pictures
No picture
■■ Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.
■■ Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.
■■ Check for sources of possible interference.
■■ Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna).
■■ Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable.
If the HDMI cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen display
can result. Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable.
APPENDIX
when connecting
HDMI
■■ Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.
181
APPENDIX
The audio function does not work.
Picture OK & No
sound
No output from one
of the speakers
Unusual sound from
inside the TV
No sound when connecting HDMI or USB
■■ Press the
+ or - button.
■■ Sound muted? Press MUTE button.
■■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■■ Are the audio cables installed properly?
■■ Adjust Balance in menu option.
■■ A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.
■■ Check HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable.
■■ Check USB cable over version 2.0.
*This feature is not available for all models.
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)
The signal is out of
range
(Invalid format)
Vertical bar or stripe on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
Screen colour is
unstable or single
colour
■■ Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.
■■ Check the input source.
■■ Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)
■■ Check the signal cable.
■■ Reinstall the PC video card.
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.
When the user changes the picture settings, ■■ It means that the TV is currently set to Store Demo mode.
the TV automatically
To switch to Home use mode you should do the followings:
converts back to the
From the TV Menu, choose OPTION -> Choose Mode Setting -> Choose
initial settings after a
Home use. Now, you have completed switching to the Home use mode.
certain period of time.
APPENDIX
182
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
1
A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
2
Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate
before switching on.
Cleaning the Cabinet
■■ To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
■■ Do not to use a wet cloth.
Extended Absence
CAUTION
►►If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to
protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
APPENDIX
183
APPENDIX
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
32LE5500-ZA / 32LE550N-ZA
32LE5800-ZA / 32LE5900-ZA
32LE5510-ZB / 32LE551N-ZB
32LE5810-ZB / 32LE5910-ZB
with stand
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm
without stand
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
12.7 kg
10.5 kg
12.7 kg
10.5 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
37LE5510-ZB / 37LE551N-ZB
37LE5810-ZB / 37LE5910-ZB
with stand
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm
without stand
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
15.6 kg
12.8 kg
15.6 kg
12.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
37LE5***
37LE5500-ZA / 37LE550N-ZA
37LE5800-ZA / 37LE5900-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
32LE5***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
184
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
42LE5500-ZA / 42LE550N-ZA
42LE5800-ZA / 42LE5900-ZA
42LE5510-ZB / 42LE551N-ZB
42LE5810-ZB / 42LE5910-ZB
with stand
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
without stand
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
47LE5510-ZB / 47LE5 51N-ZB
47LE5810-ZB / 47LE5910-ZB
with stand
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
without stand
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
47LE5***
47LE5500-ZA / 47LE550N-ZA
47LE5800-ZA / 47LE5900-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
42LE5***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
185
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
55LE5500-ZA / 55LE550N-ZA
55LE5800-ZA / 55LE5900-ZA
55LE5510-ZB / 55LE551N-ZB
55LE5810-ZB / 55LE5910-ZB
with stand
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 345.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 345.0 mm
without stand
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
with stand
without stand
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
55LE5***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
186
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
32LE7500-ZA / 32LE750N-ZA
32LE7800-ZA / 32LE7900-ZA
32LE7510-ZB / 32LE751N-ZB
32LE7810-ZB / 32LE7910-ZB
with stand
786.4 mm x 556.2 mm x 221.0 mm
786.4 mm x 556.2 mm x 221.0 mm
without stand
786.4 mm x 500.4 mm x 39.9 mm
786.4 mm x 500.4 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
14.8 kg
11.7 kg
14.8 kg
11.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
37LE7510-ZB / 37LE751N-ZB
37LE7810-ZB / 37LE7910-ZB
with stand
907.4 mm x 628.3 mm x 269.8 mm
907.4 mm x 628.3 mm x 269.8 mm
without stand
907.4 mm x 569.0 mm x 39.9 mm
907.4 mm x 569.0 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
18.8 kg
14.7 kg
18.8 kg
14.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
37LE7***
37LE7500-ZA / 37LE750N-ZA
37LE7800-ZA / 37LE7900-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
32LE7***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
187
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
42LE7500-ZA / 42LE750N-ZA
42LE7800-ZA / 42LE7900-ZA
42LE7510-ZB / 42LE751N-ZB
42LE7810-ZB / 42LE7910-ZB
with stand
1018.2 mm x 692.5 mm x 269.8 mm
1018.2 mm x 692.5 mm x 269.8 mm
without stand
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x 29.3 mm
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
23.2 kg
19.1 kg
23.2 kg
19.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
47LE7510-ZB / 47LE751N-ZB
47LE7810-ZB / 47LE7910-ZB
with stand
1128.6 mm x 758.5 mm x 284.4 mm
1128.6 mm x 758.5 mm x 284.4 mm
without stand
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x 29.8 mm
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x 29.8 mm
with stand
without stand
27.5 kg
23.0 kg
27.5 kg
23.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
47LE7***
47LE7500-ZA / 47LE750N-ZA
47LE7800-ZA / 47LE7900-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
42LE7***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
188
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
55LE7500-ZA / 55LE750N-ZA
55LE7800-ZA / 55LE7900-ZA
55LE7510-ZB / 55LE751N-ZB
55LE7810-ZB / 55LE7910-ZB
with stand
1306.0 mm x 868.1 mm x 328.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 868.1 mm x 328.0 mm
without stand
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm x 31.2 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm x 31.2 mm
with stand
without stand
39.6 kg
33.5 kg
39.6 kg
33.5 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
55LE7***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
189
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
42LE8500-ZA / 42LE850N-ZA
42LE8800-ZA / 42LE8900-ZA
42LE8510-ZB / 42LE851N-ZB
42LE8810-ZB / 42LE8910-ZB
with stand
1013.3 mm x 705.8 mm x 235.5 mm
1013.3 mm x 705.8 mm x 235.5 mm
without stand
1013.3 mm x 645.8 mm x 34.5 mm
1013.3 mm x 645.8 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
27.2 kg
23.1 kg
27.2 kg
23.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
47LE8510-ZB / 47LE851N-ZB
47LE8810-ZB / 47LE8910-ZB
with stand
1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
without stand
1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
31.6 kg
27.0 kg
31.6 kg
27.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
47LE8***
47LE8500-ZA / 47LE850N-ZA
47LE8800-ZA / 47LE8900-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
42LE8***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
190
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
55LE8500-ZA / 55LE850N-ZA
55LE8800-ZA / 55LE8900-ZA
55LE8510-ZB / 55LE851N-ZB
55LE8810-ZB / 55LE8910-ZB
with stand
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
without stand
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
43.8 kg
35.8 kg
43.8 kg
35.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
230 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
230 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
55LE8***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
191
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
32LD650-ZC / 32LD650N-ZC
32LD680-ZC / 32LD690-ZB
32LD651-ZB / 32LD651N-ZB
32LD681-ZB / 32LD691-ZB
with stand
797.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm
797.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm
without stand
797.0 mm x 495.0 mm x 73.8 mm
797.0 mm x 495.0 mm x 73.8 mm
with stand
without stand
9.8 kg
8.7 kg
9.8 kg
8.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
37LD651-ZB / 37LD651N-ZB
37LD681-ZB / 37LD691-ZB
with stand
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
without stand
916.0 mm x 560.0 mm x 77.7 mm
916.0 mm x 560.0 mm x 77.7 mm
with stand
without stand
12.8 kg
11.2 kg
12.8 kg
11.2 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
37LD6***
37LD650-ZC / 37LD650N-ZC
37LD680-ZC / 37LD690-ZB
Power requirement
Environment condition
32LD6***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
192
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
42LD650-ZC / 42LD650N-ZC
42LD680-ZC / 42LD690-ZB
42LD651-ZB / 42LD651N-ZB
42LD681-ZB / 42LD691-ZB
with stand
1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm
1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm
without stand
1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
15.5 kg
13.9 kg
15.5 kg
13.9 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
47LD651-ZB / 47LD651N-ZB
47LD681-ZB / 47LD691-ZB
with stand
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x 270.0 mm
without stand
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
20.3 kg
18.3 kg
20.3 kg
18.3 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
47LD6***
47LD650-ZC / 47LD650N-ZC
47LD680-ZC / 47LD690-ZB
Power requirement
Environment condition
42LD6***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
193
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
55LD650-ZC / 55LD650N-ZC
55LD680-ZC / 55LD690-ZB
55LD651-ZB / 55LD651N-ZB
55LD681-ZB / 55LD691-ZB
with stand
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm x 330.0 mm
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm x 330.0 mm
without stand
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm x 96.5 mm
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm x 96.5 mm
with stand
without stand
33.0 kg
29.8 kg
33.0 kg
29.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
340 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
340 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
55LD6***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
194
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
32LD750-ZA / 32LD750N-ZA
32LD780-ZA / 32LD790-ZA
32LD751-ZB / 32LD751N-ZB
32LD781-ZB / 32LD791-ZB / 32LD752-ZD
with stand
804.0 mm x 567.0 mm x 212.0 mm
804.0 mm x 567.0 mm x 212.0 mm
without stand
804.0 mm x 510.0 mm x 73.8 mm
804.0 mm x 510.0 mm x 73.8 mm
with stand
without stand
10.2 kg
8.8 kg
10.2 kg
8.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
42LD751-ZB / 42LD751N-ZB
42LD781-ZB / 42LD791-ZB / 42LD752-ZD
with stand
1032.0 mm x 700.0 mm x 260.0 mm
1032.0 mm x 700.0 mm x 260.0 mm
without stand
1032.0 mm x 639.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1032.0 mm x 639.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
16.5 kg
13.8 kg
16.5 kg
13.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
42LD7***
42LD750-ZA / 42LD750N-ZA
42LD780-ZA / 42LD790-ZA
Power requirement
Environment condition
32LD7***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
195
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
47LD750-ZA / 47LD750N-ZA
47LD780-ZA / 47LD790-ZA
47LD751-ZB / 47LD751N-ZB
47LD781-ZB / 47LD791-ZB / 47LD752-ZD
with stand
1144.0 mm x 764.0 mm x 260.0 mm
1144.0 mm x 764.0 mm x 260.0 mm
without stand
1144.0 mm x 704.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1144.0 mm x 704.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
20.9 kg
18.2 kg
20.9 kg
18.2 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
47LD7***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
196
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
1007.7 mm x 688.1 mm x 260.0 mm
without stand
1007.7 mm x 620.7 mm x 69.9 mm
with stand
without stand
17.7 kg
15.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
Power Consumption
MODELS
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
37LD840-ZA / 37LD840N-ZA
37LD880-ZA / 37LD890-ZA
1118.0 mm x 749.0 mm x 260.0 mm
without stand
1118.0 mm x 683.0 mm x 69.9 mm
with stand
without stand
20.3 kg
17.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
37LD8***
with stand
Power requirement
Environment condition
32LD840-ZA / 32LD840N-ZA
32LD880-ZA / 32LD890-ZA
with stand
Power requirement
Dimensions
32LD8***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
197
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
1007.7 mm x 688.1 mm x 260.0 mm
without stand
1007.7 mm x 620.7 mm x 69.9 mm
with stand
without stand
17.7 kg
15.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Supported movie files
42LD840-ZA / 42LD840N-ZA
42LD880-ZA / 42LD890-ZA
with stand
Power requirement
Environment condition
42LD8***
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
198
50PK5**
60PK5**
50PK590-ZE
60PK590-ZE
with stand
1171.4 mm x 786.2 mm x 309.7 mm
1392.0 mm x 915.0 mm x 384.0 mm
without stand
1171.4 mm x 724.4 mm x 55.3 mm
1392.0 mm x 852.0 mm x 55.3 mm
with stand
without stand
31.0 kg
28.6 kg
45.9 kg
41.4 kg
50PK7***
60PK7***
50PK760-ZC / 50PK760N-ZC
50PK780-ZC / 50PK790-ZC
60PK760-ZC / 60PK760N-ZC
60PK780-ZC / 60PK790-ZC
with stand
1184.0 mm x 801.0 mm x 294.5 mm
1402.8 mm x 934.3 mm x 384.0 mm
without stand
1184.0 mm x 738.5 mm x 52.4 mm
1402.8 mm x 866.8 mm x 52.4 mm
with stand
without stand
34.5 kg
29.9 kg
50.3 kg
42.7 kg
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
Operating Humidity
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
■■ For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
APPENDIX
199
APPENDIX
50PK9***
60PK9***
50PK950-ZA / 50PK960-ZA
50PK950N-ZA / 50PK980-ZA
50PK990-ZA
60PK950-ZA / 60PK960-ZA
60PK950N-ZA / 60PK980-ZA
60PK990-ZA
with stand
1190.0 mm x 804.5 mm x 294.5 mm
1408.8 mm x 937.9 mm x 384.0 mm
without stand
1190.0 mm x 737.0 mm x 52.4 mm
1408.8 mm x 860.7 mm x 52.4 mm
with stand
without stand
34.8 kg
30.2 kg
50.9 kg
43.3 kg
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
Weight
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating
Temperature
Environment condition
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60° C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■■ For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
Television System
Programme Coverage
External Antenna Impedance
APPENDIX
200
Digital TV
Analogue TV
DVB-T
PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II,
DVB-C
VHF, UHF
SECAM L/L’
VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69,
CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47
75 Ω
■■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
75 Ω
IR CODES
*This feature is not available for all models.
Code (Hexa)
Function
Note
95
Energy Saving
R/C BUTTON
08
POWER
R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)
0B
INPUT
R/C BUTTON
79
RATIO
R/C BUTTON
F0
TV/RAD
R/C BUTTON
45
Q.MENU
R/C BUTTON
43
MENU
R/C BUTTON
AB
GUIDE
R/C BUTTON
40
Up (
R/C BUTTON
41
Down (
07
Left (
06
Right (
44
OK( )
R/C BUTTON
28
BACK
R/C BUTTON
)
)
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
)
)
R/C BUTTON
5B
EXIT
R/C BUTTON
AA
INFO i
R/C BUTTON
30
AV MODE
R/C BUTTON
02
03
+
R/C BUTTON
-
R/C BUTTON
1E
FAV (MARK) (CHAR/NUM)
R/C BUTTON
09
MUTE (DELETE)
R/C BUTTON
00
P
R/C BUTTON
01
P
R/C BUTTON
Number Key 0 to 9
R/C BUTTON
10 to 19
LIST
R/C BUTTON
Q.VIEW
R/C BUTTON
72
RED Key
R/C BUTTON
71
GREEN Key
R/C BUTTON
63
YELLOW Key
R/C BUTTON
61
BLUE Key
R/C BUTTON
20
TEXT
R/C BUTTON
21
T.OPT(T.Option)
R/C BUTTON
39
SUBTITLE
R/C BUTTON
7E
SIMPLINK
R/C BUTTON
91
AD
R/C BUTTON
B1
▀
R/C BUTTON
B0
►
R/C BUTTON
BA
l l (FREEZE:Plasma TV only)
R/C BUTTON
8F
◄◄
R/C BUTTON
8E
►►
R/C BUTTON
59
NetCast
R/C BUTTON
58
@
R/C BUTTON
9F
APP/*
R/C BUTTON
APPENDIX
53
1A
201
APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an
external control device (such as a computer or an
A/V control system) to control the product’s functions externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied
with the product.
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin Name
No connection
RXD (Receive data)
TXD (Transmit data)
DTR (DTE side ready)
GND
DSR (DCE side ready)
RTS (Ready to send)
CTS (Clear to send)
No Connection
1
5
6
9
RS-232C Configurations
3-Wire Configurations(Not standard)
7-Wire Configurations (Standard RS-232C cable)
APPENDIX
RXD TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
202
PC
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS
RXD TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
PC
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
Set ID
Use this function to specify a set ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’. ► p.207
OPTION
● Country
: UK
● Disability Assistance
● Disability Assistance
● Power
● Power
Indicator
Reset
::11
● Mode
Setting
Blaster
: UK
Reset
◄
● Set ID
::11
: Home Use
● Mode
: Home Use
: Off
● IR
►
● Set ID
OK
Indicator
● Factory
►
3
Move
● Country
● IR
2
OPTION
OK
● Language(Language)
● Factory
1
Move
● Language(Language)
Setting
Blaster
: Off
1
►
Close
Select OPTION.
Select Set ID.
Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99.
APPENDIX
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
203
APPENDIX
Communication Parameters
■■ Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART)
■■ Data length : 8 bits
■■ Parity : None
■■ Stop bit : 1 bit
■■ Communication code : ASCII code
■■ Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Command Reference List
COMMAND COMMAND
1
2
APPENDIX
204
01. Power
k
02. Aspect Ratio
03. Screen Mute
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
a
00 to 01
k
c
Refer to p. 205
k
d
Refer to p. 205
04. Volume Mute
k
e
00 to 01
05. Volume Control
k
f
00 to 64
06. Contrast
k
g
00 to 64
07. Brightness
k
h
00 to 64
08. Colour
k
i
00 to 64
09. Tint
k
j
00 to 64
10. Sharpness
k
k
00 to 64
11. OSD Select
k
l
00 to 01
12. Remote control lock mode
k
m
00 to 01
13. Treble
k
r
00 to 64
14. Bass
k
s
00 to 64
15. Balance
k
t
00 to 64
16. Colour Temperature
x
u
00 to 64
17. ISM Method
j
p
Refer to p. 207
18. Energy Saving
j
q
00 to 05
19. Auto Configuration
j
u
01
20. Tune Command
m
a
Refer to p. 207
21. Programme Add/Skip
m
b
00 to 01
22. Key
m
c
Key Code
23. Control Back Light
m
g
00 to 64
24. Input select (Main)
x
b
Refer to p. 208
* [Command 1] : First command to control the TV.
(j, k, m or x)
* [Command 2] : Second command to control the TV.
: You can adjust the set ID to choose
* [Set ID]
desired monitor ID number in option
menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99.
When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every connected set is controlled.
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99)
on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to
0x63) on transmission/receiving protocol.
: To transmit command data.
* [DATA] Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of command.
: Carriage Return
* [Cr] ASCII code ‘0x0D’
: ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
* [ ]
OK Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates
present status data. If the data is data write mode,
it returns the data of the PC computer.
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving abnormal data from
* Note : During USB operations such as DivX or EMF, all
commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not exe- non-viable functions or communication errors.
cuted and treated as NG.
Data00: Illegal Code
01. Power (Command: k a)
►► To control Power On/Off of the set.
Transmission
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : Power Off
Ack
01 : Power On
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
►► To show Power On/Off.
Transmission
►► To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission
[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)
Ack
[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]
05. Volume Control (Command: k f)
Ack
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed
back presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may display on the screen when TV is power On.
02. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c) (Main Picture Size)
►► To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)
You can also adjust the screen format using the
Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)
02 : Wide screen (16:9)
04 : Zoom
06 : Original
Ack
04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
07 : 14:9
09 : Just Scan
0B : Full Wide
10 to 1F : Cinema Zoom 1 to 16
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
* In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50Hz /
60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),
Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
mode, Just Scan is available.
* Full Wide is supported only for Digital, Analogue,
AV.
03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
►► To select screen mute on/off.
Transmission
Ack
[d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute
on, TV will not display OSD.
[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Contrast (Command: k g)
►► To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
07. Brightness (Command: k h)
►► To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
08. Colour (Command: k i)
►► To adjust the screen colour.
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
APPENDIX
[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)
Video mute off
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)
10 : Video mute on
►► To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME buttons on remote control.
Transmission
205
APPENDIX
09. Tint (Command: k j)
►► To adjust the screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
13. Treble (Command: k r)
►► To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataRed : 00 to Green : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
10. Sharpness (Command: k k)
►► To adjust the screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
14. Bass (Command: k s)
►► To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Balance (Command: k t)
11. OSD Select (Command: k l)
►► To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when controlling remotely.
Transmission
[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : OSD off
Ack
01 : OSD on
►► To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Colour Temperature (Command: x u)
12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)
►► To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and
remote control.
Transmission
[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : Lock off
Ack
APPENDIX
206
01 : Lock on
[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* If you are not using the remote control, use this
mode.
When main power is on/off, external control lock is
released.
* In the standby mode, if key lock is on, TV will not
turn on by power on key of IR & Local Key.
►► To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataMin : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
Ack
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
17. ISM Method (Command: j p) (Plasma TV only)
20. Tune Command (Command: m a)
►► To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM
Method in OPTION menu.
Transmission
►► Select channel to following physical number.
Transmission
[j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data02:
04:
08:
20:
Data00 :High channel data
Data01 :Low channel data
ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care
Data02 :0x00 : Analogue Main
0x10 : DTV Main
0x20 : Radio
Channel data range
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999)
(Except For Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark,
Ireland)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999)
(Only Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland)
Orbiter
White wash
Normal
Colour Wash
Ack
[p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
18. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
►► To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can
also adjust Energy Saving in PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Power Saving
Function
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Level
1
0
Low Power
0
0
0
0
Off
0
Low Power
0
0
0
1
Minimum
0
0
Low Power
0
0
1
0
Medium
0
0
Low Power
0
0
1
1
Maximum
0
0
0
Low Power
0
1
0
0
Auto
(LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only)
0
0
0
Low Power
0
1
0
1
Screen Off
0
Intelligent
Sensor
(Plasma TV
only)
0
Low Power
0
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Description
2
0
Ack
DataMin: 00 to Max: 7DH
3
0
[m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]
1
0
21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)
Ack
[q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
►► To set skip status for the current Programme.
Transmission
[m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Skip
01 : Add
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Real data mapping 1
00 : Step 0
A:
Step 10 (Set ID 10)
F:
10 :
Step 15 (Set ID 15)
Step 16 (Set ID 16)
64 :
Step 100
6E : Step 110
►► To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.
Transmission
73 :
74 :
[j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data01: To set
Ack
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Step 115
Step 116
CF : Step 199
FE : Step 254
FF : Step 255
APPENDIX
19. Auto Configure(Command: j u)
207
APPENDIX
22. Key(Command: m c)
►► To send IR remote key code.
Transmission
[m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataKey code - Refer to page 201.
Ack
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
24. Input select (Command: x b)
(Main Picture Input)
►► To select input source for main picture.
Transmission
[x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
DataStructure
MSB
0
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
External Input
Input Number
External Input
Data
23. Control Back Light (Command: m g)
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
0
0
0
0
DTV
►► To Control the back light.
Transmission
0
0
0
1
Analogue
0
0
1
0
AV
0
1
0
0
Component
0
1
1
0
RGB
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
[m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data: data Min: 00 to Max: 64
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Input Number
HDMI
Data
0
0
0
0
Input1
0
0
0
1
Input2
0
0
1
0
Input3
0
0
1
1
Input4
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
APPENDIX
208
0
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
The following GPL executables and LGPL, MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:
GPL EXECUTABLES:
Linux kernel 2.6, busybox, e2fsprogs, jfsutils, lzo, mtd-utils, ntpclient, pkgconfig, procps, udhcpc,
vlc
LGPL LIBRARIES:
Atk, cairo, directFB, ffmpeg, gettext, glib, GnuTLS, gtk+, iconv, libidl, libgcrypt, libgpg-error, libsoup,
libusb, pango, pixman, SDL, uClibc, webkit
MPL LIBRARIES:
Nanox
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request
to LG Electronics : opensource@lge.com
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by
LG Electronics.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses on the CD-ROM provided with this product.
Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.
APPENDIX
This product includes other open source software.
■■ boost C++: software developed by http://www.boost.org distributed under the Boost Software
License, Version 1.0
■■ expat:
• copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
• copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
■■ fontconfig: copyright © 2001, 2003 Keith Packard
■■ freetype: copyright © 2003 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).
■■ ICU: copyright © 1995-2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others.
■■ libcurl: copyright © 1996 - 2008, Daniel Stenberg.
■■ libjpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright ©
1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.
■■ libmng: copyright © 2000-2007 Gerard Juyn, Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■■ libpng: copyright © 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■■ lua interpreter: copyright © 1994–2008 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
■■ md5: copyright © 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc
■■ openSSL:
• cryptographic software written by Eric Young.
• software written by Tim Hudson.
• software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)
■■ portmap: copyright © 1983,1991 The Regents of the University of California.
■■ tiff: copyright © 1987, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
■■ tinyxml: copyright © 2000-2006 Lee Thomason
■■ libxml2 : copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard
■■ libxslt: copyright © 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard
■■ xyssl: copyright © 2009 Paul Bakker
■■ zlib: copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
209
APPENDIX
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
APPENDIX
210
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors
of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
APPENDIX
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program
or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
211
APPENDIX
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
APPENDIX
212
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will
not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not
accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems
or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
APPENDIX
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
213
APPENDIX
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO
WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
APPENDIX
214
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest
you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom
of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free
programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits
more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
APPENDIX
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,
so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
215
APPENDIX
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from
the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public
License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether
that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection
in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
APPENDIX
216
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other
change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it
is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under
Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
APPENDIX
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
217
APPENDIX
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in
an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that
you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
APPENDIX
218
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two
goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
APPENDIX
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
219
APPENDIX
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
--------------1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already
Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation,
method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation
of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known,
available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form,
provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the
terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
APPENDIX
220
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,
reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,
practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the
Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor
either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use,
sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i)
third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor
with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of
this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this
License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source
Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under
the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic
Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via
Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially
became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available
even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification
is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
APPENDIX
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise
the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the
Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient
detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has
been obtained.
221
APPENDIX
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of
patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that
Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant
directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to
Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of
the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for
that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of
Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms
different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license
for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from
the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any
terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered
Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to
the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
APPENDIX
222
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from
time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms
applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is
not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases
"Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in
your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling
in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered
Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature,
must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against
Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred
to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted
by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay
Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If
within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by
the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are
revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the
initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall
survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
APPENDIX
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH
LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
223
APPENDIX
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License
is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This
License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity
chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara
County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and
Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means
that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of
this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."
APPENDIX
224
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for
Your Modifications.]
Record the model number and serial number of
the TV.
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote
this information to your dealer when requiring
any service.
Model :
Serial No. :
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Download PDF